JP6424442B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, for example, a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a hit state when the game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means provided in the game area. When the identification information (symbol) is variably displayed on the predetermined display means and the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode based on the lottery result of the acceptance or rejection lottery, a win condition advantageous to the player occurs.

  In addition, there are also many gaming machines which provide a high probability mode (so-called probability change mode) in which the winning probability is increased as compared to the normal mode after the termination of a specific winning state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-000736

  In the gaming machine exemplified above, improvement of interest is required.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest and the like for a player.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is:
Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided;
Starting ball entry means disposed in the game area;
First lottery means for performing a first hit / fall lottery with a first winning probability due to the game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
Second lottery means for performing a second hit / fall lottery with a second winning probability due to the game ball entering the start ball entering means;
First special game state generation means for generating a first special game state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the first success / failure lottery;
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode Switching means,
Mode determining means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state according to the winning result, when the winning result is obtained by the first success / failure lottery;
Second special game state generation means for generating a second special game state that is not more advantageous than the first special game state, when a winning result is obtained by the second success / failure lottery,
Display means capable of variably displaying predetermined identification information;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode in the display means to various modes;
Effect control means for controlling an effect in the display means based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means;
Equipped with
It is a gaming machine in which, when a winning result is obtained by the second success / failure lottery, the first winning probability at the time when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The effect mode setting means is
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the first success or failure lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means Effect mode to be set when
Can be set der to the same thing is,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery, and after the effect mode in the display means is made the same, the lottery by the first lottery means Information transmitting means for emitting information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode to the player when the number of times reaches a prescribed number of times,
Before the information indicating that the drawing mode is set to the specific mode is issued to the player by the information transmitting unit, the information transmitting unit transmits the information to the player by the information transmitting unit. Second information transmission means that can be suggested;
The game ball has a displacing member that can be displaced between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter the ball, and a winning result is obtained in the first hit / not lottery or the second hit / not lottery And a specific ball entry means for causing the displacement member to be in an open state,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery, and when the displacing member is in the open state, the game ball enters the ball for the specific entering means. The gist of the present invention is that the second information transmission means can suggest the transmission of the information by the information transmission means, if any.

Further, the gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest for the player and the like.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the main electric composition of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning a prize processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd collision judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd jackpot type judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows reach judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st collision judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit classification judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows through gate passage processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change display setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change end time setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hitting setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows return processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot special prize state start processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit time variable winning a prize device control processing. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot special prize sending processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot end setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit special prize state start process. It is a flow chart which shows small hitting time variable winning a prize device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit special prize sending process. It is a flow chart which shows small hitting end setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows motor-operated role control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the reception interruption process of a payment control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payment control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing of a payment control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing of a payment control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flow chart which shows change display setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for determination of a symbol. It is a figure for demonstrating a hit type. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 1st big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 2nd big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure of the probability variation big hit time * fluctuation pattern table of a normal production mode. (A) is a diagram showing the storage configuration of the 16R probability variation big hit time / variation pattern table, (b) is a diagram showing the storage configuration of the 8R probability variation big hit time / variation pattern table, (c) is 2R It is a figure which shows the storage structure of a probability variation big hit time and fluctuation pattern table, (d) is a figure showing the storage configuration of 2R time short jackpot time and fluctuation pattern table, (e) is 2R usual big hit time or small hitting It is a figure which shows the storing structure of a time and fluctuation pattern table, (f) is a figure which shows the storing structure of a reaching time and fluctuation pattern table in front and back, and (g) is a reaching time and fluctuation pattern table other than back and forth (H) is a figure which shows the storage structure of a complete removal time * fluctuation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the symbol stopped and displayed at the time of 2R normal jackpot time or small hit. It is a figure which shows the structure of an opening / closing pattern control table. It is a figure which shows the structure of an opening command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a round open command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a round closing command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of an ending command table. (A) is a figure which shows the structure of an open eye command table, (b) is a figure which shows the structure of a closed eye command table. (A) is a figure showing an effect performed when a hit occurs in the normal effect mode and an effect mode from the time of the next change, and (b) is an effect performed when a hit occurs in the probability change effect mode FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an effect mode from the time of the next change. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an opening command, a round opening command (opening command), a round closing command (closing command), and an ending command, which are set when a win is won in each effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production | presentation at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production | presentation at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production | presentation at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production | presentation at the time of 16 R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production | presentation at the time of 16 R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production | presentation at the time of 8R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of an effect during opening in 8R probability variation big hit time or 16R probability variation big hit time. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect during closing in 8R probability variation big hit time or 16R probability variation big hit time. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the ending production in 8R probability variation big hit time or 16R probability variation big hit time. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display apparatus in probability variation production mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the stop symbol displayed in 2R probability variation big hit time etc. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening production | presentation in 2R probability variation big hit time etc. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the hit middle effect in 2R probability variation big hit time etc. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the ending production in 2R probability variation big hit time etc. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display apparatus in latent presentation mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the hit middle effect in 2R probability variation big hit time etc. It is a schematic diagram which shows the opening production | presentation at the time of 2 R time junior high in the probability change production mode, or small hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit production | presentation at the time of 2R time junior high in the probability change production mode, or a small hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the ending production at the time of 2 R time junior high jackpot or small hit in probability variation production mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in time-saving effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return production displayed in a decorative symbol display apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return production displayed in a decorative symbol display apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return process suggestion effect displayed in a decorative symbol display apparatus. It is an enlarged front view which shows another example of a starting winning a prize mouth. It is a flow chart which shows another example of jackpot end setting processing. It is a figure which shows another example of a variable winning prize apparatus, (a) is an enlarged front view, (b), (c) is an expansion plane perspective view. It is a figure which shows another example of a variable winning prize apparatus, (a) is an enlarged front view, (b), (c) is an expansion plane perspective view. It is a flow chart which shows another example of small hitting end setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit time special prize state start process used when performing return processing suggestion production in small hit inside production. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of return process lottery effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit end setting process used when performing return processing lottery production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change end time setting process used when performing return processing lottery production. Return processing is a flow chart showing an example of return processing used when executing the lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the button display etc. which are displayed in return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the button display etc. which are displayed in return process lottery effect. It is a flowchart which shows production button processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of small hitting end setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of return processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process remaining frequency | count display production. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of return process lottery effect. It is a flow chart which shows another example of small hitting end setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of return processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation displayed at the time of big hit at the time of fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation displayed at the time of big hit at the time of fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation displayed at the time of detachment | lose at the time of fluctuation | variation.

  Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described in detail based on the drawings. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30 and the like. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, the back pack unit 203 and the like are opened. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and prizes disposed on the surface of the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 3 etc., the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the outer frame 11 which comprises the outer shell of the said pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 is supported by one side part of this outer frame 11 so that opening and closing is possible. .

  In the outer frame 11, as shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the upper side frame forming portion 11a and the lower side frame forming portion 11b are formed of wooden plate members, and the left side frame forming portion 11c and the right side frame forming portion 11d are formed by extrusion of aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are made of a material, and are assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower end portions of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are accommodated in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

  Further, an extending wall portion 83 is formed on the right side frame forming portion 11d so as to protrude toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction. The extended wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided so as to protrude toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

  Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening and closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening and closing axis as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 mainly includes a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a lower plate 15 is provided as a ball tray at the lower center of the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and gaming balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower plate 15. It is possible. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removing lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, the left part of the lower plate 15 is provided with an effect button 125 having an LED built-in, and by pressing the effect button 125, the corresponding effect in the decorative symbol display device 42 etc. Or the content of the presentation is changed.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball emission handle (hereinafter simply referred to as a handle) 18 is provided as an operation means projecting to the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and operation amount detection means (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball tray for temporarily storing game balls and aligning them in a line and guiding them toward a game ball launch device (hereinafter simply referred to as a launch device) 60 as a launch means described later. When the upper tray 19 is full of gaming balls, the gaming balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper tray 19. Thereby, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a state where a bill, a card or the like is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) disposed to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall etc. Loan balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, a pachinko machine in which a game ball is directly lent out to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are unnecessary.

  Furthermore, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removing button 123. When the ball release button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicated with the lower plate 15 is opened, and stored in the upper plate 19. The gaming balls are guided to the lower plate 15 (fall). That is, the player can transfer the game balls on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball release button 123.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. These light emission means play a role of changing and controlling the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot or the predetermined reach, etc., and playing a role to enhance the rendering effect during the game. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, a frame lamp 102 incorporating light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Further, an error display lamp 104 which lights up at the time of a predetermined error is provided at a portion of the frame lamp 102 adjacent to both sides of the window portion 101. In the upper part of each error display lamp 104 in the frame lamp 102, a large number of fine through holes are formed corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back of the front frame set 14.

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. In the glass unit 137, a pair of conventional front and back rectangular glass plates are not separately attached in a front and back pair but are assembled in a round shape as a whole.

  Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (the resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge portion in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Accordingly, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

  In the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, the lower position of the window hole 39 (game board 30), the launcher 60 as a launcher and the game ball immediately after being launched from the launcher 60 are A launch rail 61 is attached for guiding. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is employed as the launcher 60. Also, a ball feeding device for guiding the gaming balls guided from the upper tray 19 above the launching device 60 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one ball at a time by driving the built-in drive means (for example, solenoid) 63 are provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device (large winning opening) 32, an upper start winning opening 33A, a lower starting winning opening 33B, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, a first special display 43L and A second special display device 43R or the like is disposed in a through hole formed by router processing, and is attached from the front side of the game board 30 by a wood screw or the like. As is well known, when a game ball is won (entered) in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning opening 33A, and the lower starting winning opening 33B, it is detected by various detecting switches. A predetermined number of winning balls are paid out (or the lower plate 15). For example, if there is a winning on the upper start winning opening 33A, three if there is a winning on the lower starting winning opening 33B, if there is a winning on the general winning opening 31 10 When there is a winning on the variable winning device 32, 15 gaming balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15). In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not won a prize in the various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. .

  Here, the starting ball entering means in the present embodiment is constituted by the upper starting ball entering means 33A and the lower starting ball entering means 33B, the upper starting winning opening 33A constitutes the first starting ball entering means, and the lower starting winning hole 33B constitutes a second starting ball entry means. In addition, the variable winning device 32 constitutes a specific ball entry means.

  Further, on the game board 30, a large number of nails are implanted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed. As a result, it is adjusted such that winnings on the above-mentioned start winning openings 33A, 33B, etc. occur with an appropriate probability.

  The variable winning device 32 has a large winning opening 32a through which a game ball can win, and a rectangular flat opening and closing plate 32b as an opening and closing member for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a (corresponding to "displacement member" in this embodiment) And a special winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close the opening and closing plate 32b.

  While the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state where the game ball can not be won to the big winning opening 32a, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when a big hit or a small hit described later occurs, the big win By exciting the mouth solenoid, the open / close plate 32b is tilted forward with the lower side thereof as a pivot, and the gaming ball is in an open state where it can be won by the big winning opening 32a.

  In the upper start winning opening 33A, the game ball can always be paid. On the other hand, the lower starting winning opening 33B is provided with an electric combination 37 as an opening and closing type winning aid.

  The motorized prize 37 includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37a as an opening and closing member which is pivoted in the left and right direction with the lower end side as an axis, and a start winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the movable blades 37a. When the movable blade 37a opens and closes in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can win to the lower start winning opening 33B and the game ball can not win to the lower start winning opening 33B It is comprised so that a state change is possible between these closed states.

  Although details will be described later, a first start winning switch 224A and a second start winning switch 224B are provided in the upper start winning opening 33A and the lower starting winning opening 33B, respectively, for detecting the winning game balls. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224A, 224B, the first hit or not lottery whether to generate a big hit state, and the second hit or not lottery whether to generate a small hit state are performed The variable display is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R (and the decorative symbol display device 42 described later). When the player wins the first hit lottery, the jackpot state is given, and when the second win lottery is won, the small hit state is given.

  Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 45, in the present embodiment, there are “16R probability variation jackpot”, “8R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R time junior high jackpot” and “2R regular jackpot” as jackpot types.

  In the jackpot state of "16R probability variation jackpot", this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds) with "long release" as one special prize state. Moreover, in the big hit state of "8R probability variation big hit", this is repeated eight times (eight rounds), with "long open" as one special prize state.

  In the present embodiment, “long release” means that 30 seconds of the specified time elapses after the opening / closing plate 32 b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or the variable winning device 32 has the specified number. One opening / closing operation until the closed state is reached on condition that 10 game balls win.

  In the jackpot state of "2R probability variation jackpot", this is repeated twice (two rounds) with "short open" as one special prize state. Moreover, also in "2R hour junior high hit" and "2R normal jackpot", this is repeated twice (2 rounds), with "short open" as one special prize status.

  In the present embodiment, “short open” means that 0.4 seconds of the specified time elapses after the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or the variable winning device 32 is defined. One opening / closing operation until the closed state is reached on condition that the number of three game balls wins.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is fired toward the game area at a rate of one in 0.6 seconds from the launch device 60 based on the operation of the handle 18 of the player. On the other hand, in the above "short opening", the opening regulation time of the opening and closing plate 32b is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of the opening and closing plate 32b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, even one game ball may not be won by only one "short opening". For this reason, the opening and closing plate 32b is hardly closed based on the condition (three winning numbers) related to the number of winnings among the two closing conditions corresponding to the "short opening", and the opening and closing plate 32b once opened. Is usually closed based on the passage of a prescribed time (0.4 seconds). Thereby, in the execution period of "short open", it is avoided that the execution period changes each time.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned various “probable variation big hits” occur, “high probability mode (high probability state)” (corresponding to “specific mode”) is given as a lottery mode after the end of the big hit state. On the other hand, when “2R hour / time junior high hit” or “2R normal jackpot” occurs, “low probability mode (low probability state)” (corresponding to “normal mode”) is given after the end of the jackpot state.

  The "high probability mode" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the "low probability mode" which is usually set. The "high probability mode" set after the jackpot ends continues until the next jackpot state occurs.

  Further, after the above various jackpots have been completed, the special display devices 43L, 43R perform the variable display of the predetermined number of times, or until the next jackpot state occurs, the prize support mode according to the motorized prize 37 As "high support mode (high ball entry state)" may be given.

  In the “high support mode”, the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the motorized prize 37 of the lower start winning opening 33B is lower than in the “low support mode (low ball entry state)” set at normal times. It says the state that has increased.

  For example, as the "high support mode", (1) a state where the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 described later is shorter than that in the "low support mode", (2) one time of the movable blade 37a of the electric character 37 The open time (specified time) is longer than in the "low support mode", (3) The specified number of game balls that can be won per opening of the movable blade 37a is larger than in the "low support mode" (4) When the winning result is obtained by the opening lottery of the motorized character 37 caused by the game ball passing through the gate 34, the number of times of execution of the opening and closing process of the movable blade 37a performed at one time is "low support mode (5) The probability of winning in the open lottery of the electric character 37 is higher than the probability of winning in the "low support mode". In the high support mode in the present embodiment, the configurations of the above (1), (2), and (5) are adopted. Of course, not limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, the gaming ball is likely to be frequently awarded to the lower start winning opening 33B, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed increases, and the ball holding state becomes good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the “high support mode” is given, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are changed by changing the fluctuation pattern table described later to a table for the “high support mode”. The variable display time in (the decorative symbol display device 42) is configured to be shorter than that in the "low support mode".

  In the present embodiment, after the completion of “16R probability variation jackpot” and “8R probability variation jackpot”, “high support mode” is given until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until next time-high support mode". In addition, after the end of the “2R probability variation jackpot” in the “high probability mode”, the “next high support mode” is given. Furthermore, even in the "low probability mode", the "high support mode until the next time" is given even after the end of the "2R probability variation jackpot" in the "time reduction effect mode" described later. On the other hand, the "low support mode" is maintained after the completion of the "2R probability variation jackpot" in the "low probability mode" other than the "time reduction effect mode".

  Furthermore, after the end of the “2R hour / time junior high hit”, the “high support mode” is given while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the “100 times” change display. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "100 times high support mode".

  In addition, after the end of "2R normal jackpot", "low support mode" is basically given, but after the end of "2R normal jackpot" in "time reduction effect mode" or "probability effect mode" described later , "100 times high support mode" is granted.

  In the present embodiment, various gaming states are generated by combining the various modes.

  For example, when the "high probability mode" and the "high support mode" are given, it becomes a so-called "probability change (probability fluctuation) mode". In the "probable variation mode", when it is clearly shown that the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is in the positive variation state, and when the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is "time reduction mode" described later There are times when things are similar. Therefore, based on the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42, it may not be possible to discriminate between the "high probability mode" and the "low probability mode".

  When the "low probability mode" and the "low support mode" are given, it becomes a so-called "normal mode". In the "normal mode", when the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 becomes the normal effect mode ("normal effect mode"), and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described later "latency mode" There is a time when it becomes the same as the time ("latency production mode"). Therefore, based on the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42, it may not be possible to discriminate between the "high probability mode" and the "low probability mode".

  When the "low probability mode" and the "100 times high support mode" are given, it becomes a so-called "time saving (time shortening) mode".

  When the "high probability mode" and the "low support mode" are given, it becomes a so-called "latency (latency probability change) mode". In the “latent mode”, the jackpot probability is simply increased, and the surface is in the same state as the “normal mode”. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the state in which the "high probability mode" is given.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned various “big hits”, “small hits” are generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the above-mentioned second pass / fail lottery. In the small hitting state, basically the variable winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times (in the present embodiment, a short time (for example, 0.4 seconds) similar to the above "short opening") Opening is performed twice], but when the number of winning game balls for the variable winning device 32 becomes equal to or more than a predetermined maximum number M1 (10 in the embodiment), the opening is ended. The variable winning device 32 is closed prior to. For example, when the number of balls entered into the variable winning device 32 becomes equal to or greater than the maximum number M1 of winning possible prizes at the first opening, the small hitting state ends without the second opening being performed. In addition, in the second opening, when the number of winning game balls for the variable winning device 32 (total number of first opening and second opening total winnings) becomes equal to or more than the maximum number M1 of possible winning combinations, the opening time at the second opening is 0 Even if it is less than 4 seconds, the variable winning device 32 is closed, and the small hitting state ends.

  In addition, the lottery mode and the prize support mode provided after the end of the small hit state are the original modes before the small hit state occurs. For example, if the lottery mode before the occurrence of the small hitting state is the "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small hitting state ends.

  In addition, although this will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the game ball is awarded when winning in the winning lottery in the case of winning in the upper starting winning opening 33A and in the case of winning in the lower starting winning opening 33B. The distribution of jackpot types is different. When winning the winning lottery triggered by the game ball to the top start winning opening 33A, any of "16R probability variation big hit", "8R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal jackpot" If you win a winning lottery triggered by the game ball to the bottom start winning opening 33B, it will be distributed to one of "16R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R hour junior high hit" It will be Further, the "small hit" is generated only when the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A is won.

  Each of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is configured by two segment display devices, and is installed at the bottom of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source consisting of an LED, and the individual light source can be turned on and off to turn on only one arbitrary display segment and to set any group. It is possible to light the display segment of the alignment. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on each segment display device.

  The variable display is performed on the first special display device 43L triggered by the game ball winning to the upper start winning opening 33A, and the second special display device 43R triggered by the game ball winning to the lower start winning opening 33B. The variable display is performed at the The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as main control means described later. The first special display device 43L constitutes a first special display means, and the second special display device 43R constitutes a second special display means.

  In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, whether or not the jackpot lottery is won is displayed in a definite manner by the display mode when the variable display is stopped. Ru. For example, when the game ball wins in the upper start winning opening 33A, the variable display is performed at high speed on the corresponding first special display device 43L, and when a predetermined time passes, any display mode is stopped (for example, stopped for several seconds) ). Then, when the jackpot lottery is won, numerical values and the like corresponding to various jackpots are displayed at the time of fluctuation stop, and a jackpot state occurs.

  For example, when "16 R probability variation jackpot" is won, "9-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when it is elected "8 R probability variation jackpot", the first or “7−” is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R. In addition, when “2R probability variation big hit” is won, “2-” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when “2R hour junior high hit” is won, the first or second Is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when “2R normal jackpot” is won, “2_” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R. . Furthermore, when the "small hit" is won, "2.-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. Here, in order to enhance the rendering effect of "2R probability variation jackpot" particularly in the "low probability mode", the termination manner "2-" pertaining to "2R probability variation jackpot" and the termination manner "2_" pertaining to "2R normal jackpot" It is preferable that the stop mode "2.-" related to the "small hit" has a confusing configuration. In addition, in order to enhance the effect of "small hit" in the "certain change mode", the stop mode "2.-" related to "small hit" and the stop mode "2 |" related to "2R hourly junior high hit" It is preferable that the stop mode “2_” related to “2R normal jackpot” has a confusing configuration.

  Of course, the stop mode of the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to various types of contacts is not limited to the above mode. For example, there may be a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one hit type instead of one. For example, when the player wins the "16R probability variation jackpot", one of "91", "92", "93", ... is selected on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and the stop display is performed. The configuration may be

  In addition, even when there are a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one hit type, a plurality of stop modes according to "2R probability variation jackpot", and "2R hour junior high hit" It is preferable that the stop mode which concerns on, the stop mode which concerns on "2R normal jackpot", and the several stop mode which concerns on "small hit" become a confusing structure. For example, as a plurality of stop modes according to "2R probability variation jackpot", any one of "X-", "X.-", "X |", "X_", ... (X is, for example, "1", “2”, “3”, etc.) are displayed in a stopped state, and “X.−”, “X |”, “X_”, “X_”, “X-”,.・ ・ ・ One of the stop modes is displayed, and as a stop mode related to "2R normal jackpot", any one of "X |", "X_", "X-", "X-.", ... is a stop display Alternatively, any one of “X_”, “X-”, “X-.”, “X |”,... May be stopped and displayed as a plurality of stop modes related to “small hit”. In this configuration, "X-", "X-.", "X |", "X_" are the stop modes according to "2R probability variation jackpot", the stop modes according to "2R hour junior high jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" It is the structure allocated to each of the stop mode which concerns on, and the stop mode which concerns on "a small hit."

  Further, the color displayed in any or all of the display segments may be changed as appropriate.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball newly wins the start winning opening 33A, 33B during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the variable display of that amount is the time It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display performed in the above. That is, the variable display is put on hold (pending). The maximum number of times of this suspended variable display is determined for each type of pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, the game ball winning in the upper start winning opening 33A and the gaming ball winning in the lower start winning opening 33B Respectively, up to 4 variable displays (a total of 8 variable displays) are reserved. In addition, the number of times of holding is indicated by lighting with the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. When the gaming ball newly wins the start winning openings 33A, 33B during the jackpot state, the variable display for that portion is also suspended.

  In addition, basically, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper starting winning opening 33A is stored in the order in which the corresponding gaming balls are winning to the upper starting winning opening 33A and is digested in the winning order, and the lower starting winning opening The variable display triggered by the winning on 33B is stored in the order in which the corresponding gaming balls are winning in the lower start winning opening 33B and is digested in the winning order. However, when both the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33A and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B are suspended (the first hold lamp 46a and the second In the case where one or more holding lamps 46 b are on), the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33 B is preferentially digested. That is, when the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B is not all digested, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33A is not performed. For example, in a state where one first holding lamp 46a is on, when the gaming ball is won in the lower start winning opening 33B and one second holding lamp 46b is turned on, a winning in the upper starting winning opening 33A The variable display triggered by the trigger is delayed, and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B is performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33A is also referred to as "first variable display", and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B is "second variable display" It is also called "."

  The through gate 34 is configured such that gaming balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. Although described later in detail, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when the game gate is detected by the through gate switch 225, the motor is electrically operated. An open lottery as to whether or not the character 37 (the lower start winning opening 33B) is to be opened is performed, and the variable display is performed by the normal symbol display device 41. Then, when the player wins in the open lottery, the motorized jack 37 is opened for a specified time. The through gate 34 corresponds to the trigger entering means in the present embodiment. In addition, the open lottery whether or not to open the electric combination 37 (lower start winning opening 33B) constitutes the third success or failure lottery in the present embodiment, the function of the main control device 261 to execute this A third lottery means in the form is constituted.

  In the variable display unit 35, an ordinary symbol display 41 which is variably displayed triggered by the passage of the through gate 34, and a decorative symbol display which is variably displayed in accordance with the variably display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. And 42 are provided. The decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes a display means in the present embodiment.

  Furthermore, in the variable display unit 35, a variation indicating which of the upper start winning opening 33A and the lower starting winning opening 33B corresponds to the variable display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42. A specific lamp 40 is provided.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display "o" or "x" as a normal symbol, and whenever the game ball passes through the gate 34, for example, the normal symbol is "o"-> "x"-> The variable display is performed at high speed as follows: Then, when the variable display is stopped for a few seconds with the symbol "o" (winning symbol), the motorized handpiece 37 of the lower start winning opening 33B is in the open state only for a prescribed time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later. The normal symbol display device 41 corresponds to the third display means in the present embodiment.

  Further, when the gaming ball newly passes through gate 34 during the variable display of normal symbol display device 41, the variable display of that portion is performed after the end of the variable display being performed at that time. It has become. That is, the variable display is put on hold (pending). Although the maximum number of times of the variable display to be held is determined for each type of pachinko machine, in the present embodiment, the number of times of holding is held up to 4 times, and the number of times of holding is lit and displayed by the holding lamp 44 There is.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by a sub control device 262 as a sub control means described later and the display control device 45. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 performs an auxiliary operation based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R. The specific display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 described later.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with three symbol display areas of upper, middle and lower, and symbols (numbers) as plural types of identification information are sequentially arranged in each symbol display area. The symbols are displayed (variably displayed), and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in order (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display region → the lower symbol display region → the middle symbol display region) for each symbol display region. For example, when the above "16R probability variation big hit" or "8R probability variation big hit" is determined in the main controller 261, the first or second special display device 43L, 43R displays a display corresponding to these big hits and the decorative symbol The symbols are stopped and displayed on the display device 42 in a combination corresponding to these large hits (for example, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the symbols stopped and displayed in the lower pattern display area are the same). Is started.

  In addition, “2R probability variation jackpot” is determined, or “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit” is decided in “normal effect mode” or “latency effect mode”, the symbol is displayed on decorative symbol display device 42 The stop display is displayed in a combination corresponding to these hits (for example, a special symbol that may not normally appear in the middle symbol display area (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "special symbol" is stop displayed), and the hit state is started Be done. Thereby, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area, the player is more advantageous to the player, "2R probability variation jackpot" and not so advantageous "2R normal jackpot" based on the stop symbol. And since the player can not distinguish between "small hit" and "2R probability variation big hit", it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest.

  Furthermore, "2R time junior high jackpot" is determined, or, in the production mode "probable variation production mode" (in this case, the lottery mode is "high probability mode") or "time reduction production mode", "2R normal jackpot" or Once the "small hit" is determined, the symbol may be referred to as a "predetermined combination of symbols" (hereinafter referred to as "a combination of symbols") on the decorative symbol display device 42. The symbol may be described as “the symbol” (for example, “2” in the upper symbol display area, “4” in the middle symbol display area, and “6” in the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed), and the hit state Is started. Therefore, the player keeps the lottery mode “high probability mode” with “2R hour shorts per win” and “2R normal jackpot” in which the lottery mode is switched to “low probability mode” based on the stop symbol. Since it can not be distinguished from "small hit" and can be expected to maintain the "high probability mode", it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

  The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot and the jackpot can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the case of “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R time junior high jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot”, and “small hit”, the upper, middle, lower figure design display area The combination of the specific symbols stopped and displayed on may be configured differently, or the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper, middle and lower design display areas may be configured to be the same. . Furthermore, in the case of "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R hour junior high jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit", it is displayed on the surface in a combination of random deviations as in the case of deviations. You may

  Furthermore, when symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to "big hit" or "small hit", for example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower pattern display region as the previous step. The Rukoto. Thus, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the state in which the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. In addition, even if reach condition occurs, when “16R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” etc. does not occur, the above special is different from the symbols displayed stopped in the upper symbol display area and the lower pattern display region. The symbols other than the symbol are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Moreover, even if the reach state occurs, it may happen that the stop display is performed with a symbol such as the above "specified symbol".

  Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 42 (hold display area W3 described later), the number of holdings of the variable display in the special display devices 43L, 43R is displayed corresponding to the hold lamps 46a, 46b (( See FIG. 59 etc.).

  The special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in an inconspicuous place, such as the lower corner of the game area, which is difficult for the player to see, the size of the display is small, and the time for which the discrimination character is stopped and displayed is relatively long. short. Therefore, if the special display devices 43L and 43R are kept an eye on and carefully observed, it is substantially impossible to grasp the gaming state to be given.

  The fluctuation identification lamp 40 is provided with an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red, and in the decorative symbol display device 42, the fluctuation display is performed with a winning of the upper start winning opening 33A. In the case, the light is emitted in blue, and the light is emitted in red when the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B is being performed.

  Further, a center frame 47 is disposed in the variable display unit 35 so as to surround the decorative symbol display unit 42. A ball entry port 151 is provided at the upper part of the center frame 47, and the gaming ball entered into the ball entry port 151 is formed inside the center frame 47, and along the side of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via a warp channel 152 extending vertically. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 onto the game area in front, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters a pocket 154 formed on the central back side of the stage 153 . The pocket 154 is in communication with the guide passage 155 leading to the game area immediately above the upper start winning opening 33A, and the gaming ball entering the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability that the upper starting winning hole 33A It is supposed to win a prize.

  Further, on the game board 30, there are attached rails 50 for guiding the game balls fired from the launcher 60 to the upper part of the game board 30, which are composed of an inner rail structure 51 and an outer rail structure 52. As a result, the game balls fired in response to the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the firing rails 61 and the rails 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail forming portion 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the gaming balls guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area once return to the inside of the rail 50 again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming portion 52 is disconnected at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail forming portion 51 is disconnected at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball launched by the launcher 60 passes back the rail 50 until it passes the return ball preventing member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail configuration parts 51 and 52 are removed from the game area It is eaten.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication passage 71 connecting the discharge mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray communication passage 73 connecting the discharge mechanism portion 352 to the upper tray 19. In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the firing rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail forming portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 has the gaming balls dropped from the gap. A far ball passage 72 guiding to the lower plate 15 is formed. Thus, if the game ball launched from the launcher 60 does not reach the return ball preventing member 53 and returns the rail 50 back as a far ball, the far ball is moved to the lower tray 15 through the far ball passage 72. Exhausted.

  Further, reference numeral 67 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 is a payout passage for guiding the gaming balls paid out by the payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward by an urging force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the dispensing passage 67. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 can be pushed open by the rear end on the inlet side of the lower tray communication passage 71. The inlets (ball inlets) of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective inlets and the dispensing passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance when the front frame set 14 is closed. The game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 become full of gaming balls, the gaming balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication passage 71 side (the inlet side of the lower tray communication passage 71 overflows), It will be dispensed to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a fullness detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. By the presence of the full detection switch, it is determined that the lower plate 15 is full of gaming balls (the lower plate 15 is full of gaming balls and the gaming balls are stagnant in the lower plate communication path 71) be able to. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, control is performed to prohibit launch of the launch device 60. It should be noted that the retention of the gaming ball in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated, and the launch of the launching device 60 is permitted when the gaming ball is not detected by the fullness detection switch (when it is not detected continuously for a predetermined time).

  Next, the rear face configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged up and down, right and left so as to be partially overlapped in front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. And protective covers made of resin are attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion may be generally referred to as a back pack, so that unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" herein.

  First, the rear face configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole at the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind 213 is provided to project rearward. In addition, on the back side of the frame cover 213, the decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45 and the sub control device 262 can be detached Is attached to

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is accommodated in a storage box 42b having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213 It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (housing box 42b). The sub controller 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262 a and fixed to the back side of the display controller 45 (substrate box 45 a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving an LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. Further, the housing box 42b and the substrate boxes 45a, 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning openings 33A, 33B, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting the game balls that have won the various winning openings. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, a substrate box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member can not be opened without leaving a predetermined trace. Thus, it can be easily found that the substrate box 263 has been tampered with.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a prize detection switch (ball entering detection means) for detecting the gaming balls that have won the various prize ports, corresponding to the various prize ports such as the general prize port 31 and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the variable winning device 32 is provided with a count switch 223. Further, the upper start winning opening 33A is provided with a first starting winning switch 224A, and the lower starting winning opening 33B is provided with a second start winning switch 224B. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first panel relay board electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. . The first board relay board relays the winning opening switch 221 and the like to the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

  On the other hand, the start winning switches 224A and 224B for detecting winning on the start winning openings 33A and 33B are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

  The detection results respectively detected by the various winning detection switches are taken into main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the payout number of gaming balls) according to the winning situation in each case is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of gaming balls are calculated based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit of a resin molded back pack 351 and a payout mechanism portion 352 of the game ball. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened backward with the open and close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

  The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various information to a hall computer or the like of the game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, although the code is not attached, for example, a terminal for outputting information related to the current gaming state (such as a jackpot state or high probability mode), a front frame set 14 or the like detected by an open detection switch 91 or 92 described later A terminal for outputting information on opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information on various error conditions such as a winning error, a bottom plate error, a tank ball no error, a payout error, a payout to be paid out from the payout control device 311 A terminal or the like for outputting information on the number of balls is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a terminal for outputting information on "small hit" is provided, and "small hit" occurrence information is output, but "small hit" occurrence information It may be configured not to output.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, an ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 which protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263 together. Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the substrate box 263 and the terminal portion (substrate side connector) provided along the upper edge portion of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The dispensing mechanism portion 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and gaming balls supplied from an island facility of the game hall are successively supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, there is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the lateral direction and which slopes gently toward the downstream side, and further, on the downstream side of the tank rail 356, a case rail 357 longitudinally. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and the required number of gaming balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The gaming balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

  In addition, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism portion 352, and a power switch board 382 for fetching the main power from the outside is installed. There is. The power switch substrate 382 is supplied with, for example, 24 V AC main power via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382 a.

  Under the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-described ball collection mechanism flow, and the game ball is formed at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. That is, the gaming balls having won in the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 also communicates with the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that did not win in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are separately formed and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It may be

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, a state in which a payout control device 311 as a payout control means, a discharge control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are stacked in front and back on the back side of the lower frame set 251. It is attached removably.

  The emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. The emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for the sake of convenience, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed substrate).

  In addition, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the substrate box 311 a and fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313 a (the emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313). A sealing member is provided in the substrate box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is accommodated, and an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection substrate 314 is accommodated in the substrate box 314a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

  Each of the substrate boxes 311a, 313a, 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be viewed.

  Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state recovery switch 321 which protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed at the occurrence of a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor unit, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse to resolve the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the substrate box 313a. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and maintains the state at the time of the power failure even when the power failure occurs, and may restore the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (power recovery) it can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, at the end of business in the game hall), the state before the power is turned off is stored, so when returning to the initial state when the power is turned on Throw in

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and one side is rotated by one. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  As described above, the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 covering the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of the outer frame 11, and to operate the locking device 600 by the said wire etc. As a result, defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extension wall 83 covers the right end (the end on the left side in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12 The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 can not be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the front lower right portion (right side of the launcher 60) of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided in the lower right rear portion (lower left in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12. The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each include a detection unit that can be inserted into and withdrawn from the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided such that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided such that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main unit, the on signal is output to the main control device 261, and the detection unit is pressed to the switch main unit side and in the state of being retracted into the switch main unit It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back of the front frame set 14 and turned off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the projecting state. It will be on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed on the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 to be turned off, and detection is performed when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the projecting state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main controller 261 (main substrate) is mounted with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 has a ROM 502 storing various control programs to be executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area in which values such as various flags, counters, and I / O are stored. And a backup area 503a.

  In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  When the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a includes a power-off time (including a power-down occurrence) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off. The same is an area for storing values such as stack pointers, registers, and I / O. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and conversely, restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main processing when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure cancellation). Is executed in A power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542 described later is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like. The occurrence of the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

  If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input / output port 505 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543 to be described later, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards etc. is omitted for convenience, various detection switches, such as winning opening switch 221, count switch 223, start winning unit switches 224A and 224B, through gate switch 225, etc. Various electrical components such as various substrates are connected. That is, although the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (substrate side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions and the like.

  The sub control unit 262 (sub control board) includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and various control programs stored in the ROM 552. A RAM 553 which is a memory for temporarily storing data etc., an input / output port 554, and a bus line 555 are provided, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit not shown are also provided. The RAM 553 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  The CPU 551, the ROM 552, and the RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected. Further, to the input / output port 554, the speaker SP, the effect button 125, various electric decoration parts, and the lamps 102 and 104 are connected.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command (for example, "variation pattern command") transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it. As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit is displayed is displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, the display in accordance with the display of the special display devices 43L, 43R is performed.

  Further, the payout control device 311 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing a control program to be executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and data can be held (backup), and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a Data is backed up. If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a is a stack pointer at power-off, each register, and so on, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned on again when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. This area is for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. As in the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive the power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a “payout permission flag” in which the payout control of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, and a “command reception flag” set when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, A command buffer in which a command transmitted from main controller 261 is stored is provided.

  The “payout permission flag” is a flag for setting the payout permission of the winning balls, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the winning balls is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, It is turned off when it is restored before the processing of the initial setting or power off. In the present embodiment, the specific command is a “dispense initialization command” that instructs an initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a “prize ball command” that instructs the payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 These are three of the "delivery return commands" that are sent when a power recovery occurs.

  The “command reception flag” is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received, and, similarly to the “payout permission flag”, it is initialized. It is turned off when returned to the state before processing or power off, and turned off when the command received by the command determination processing is determined.

  The command buffer is configured of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 including the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. Connected to the input / output port 515 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312, a payout device 358, and the like.

  The card unit connection board 314 is a ball operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. , And are electrically connected to each other, and take in a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. The card unit connection substrate 314 can be omitted in a cash machine in which the game balls are directly lent out to the upper tray 19 from the ball lending device or the like without the intervention of a card unit.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the gaming ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the release control signal is outputted from the payout control device 311, that the player is detecting by the sensor signal that the player is touching the handle 18, the release stop switch is operated to stop the release. The firing device 60 is driven under the condition that the game ball is not being used, and the gaming ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes variable display of symbols in the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub controller 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And have. The input port 527 is connected to an input / output port 554 of the sub controller 262. The CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and to the output port 529, a decorative symbol display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device is connected.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 526 should be referred to as a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524 and the like to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 for monitoring power supply interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. The +12 V power supply, the +5 V power supply, and the backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like. An operation power supply (+12 V power supply, +5 V power supply, etc.) is supplied to the emission control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 at the time of power failure due to occurrence of power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The blackout signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for execution of the power failure process even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can execute and complete the power failure processing normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (including the power on due to a power failure cancellation) while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. Ru.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  First, the operation of main controller 261 will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs the lottery using various counter information in the game.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a random number counter C1 used in a lottery for determining whether a jackpot state or a small jackpot state is generated or not, and a jackpot type determination used for determination of a jackpot type The counter C2, the reach selection counter C3 used for determining whether or not the reach state is to be generated when changing out the decorative symbol display device 42, the type of reach to be generated, etc., and the initial value of the random number counter C1 Determination of the fluctuation display time of the random number initial value counter CINI used for value setting and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 42 Of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for the determination of the symbol etc., and the lottery of the normal symbol display device 41 (the electric winning combination 3 of the lower start winning opening 33B It is set to be used and normal symbol random number counter C4 for use in the open state to whether an open draw).

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, returns to the lower limit value 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 is provided with a special variation suspension area in which the values of the per random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2 and the reach selection counter C3 are stored, and a normal variation suspension area in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored. It is done. The normal change pending area is provided with one execution area and four pending areas (pending first to pending fourth areas).

  In addition, the special variation reserve area includes a first special variation reserve area and a second special variation reserve area each having four reserve areas (preserve first to reserve fourth area), and one execution area.

  In each reserve area of the first special variation reserve area, each value of the random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2 and the reach selection counter C3 is time-series in accordance with the game ball history of the upper starting winning opening 33A. Stored. The first special variation holding area constitutes a first holding means.

  In each reserve area of the second special variation reserve area, the values of the random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2 and the reach selection counter C3 are time-series in accordance with the game ball history of the lower starting winning opening 33B. Stored. The second special fluctuation holding area constitutes a second holding means.

  In the execution area and each reserve area in the special variation reserve area, a per random number storage area for storing the value of the per random number counter C1, a big hit random number storage area for storing the value of the big hit type determination counter C2, a reach selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing the value of is provided.

  In each reserve area of the ordinary variation reserve area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passage history of the gaming ball to the through gate 34.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to hold the variable displays on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times as described above.

  Describing each of the counters in detail, the per random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 398, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 398) as the final value, and then 0 which is the lower limit as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Usually, when the per random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the per random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the per random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 398), and is updated once every timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. On the other hand, the per random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the per random number counter C1 is stored in the per random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the gaming ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B, the value of the per random number counter C1 stored in the per random number counter buffer is the first special variation reserve area or the second special variation It is stored in the pending area. Accordingly, such processing constitutes a part of the first and second success lotterys.

  There are two types of values for the jackpot random number in the "low probability mode" and the "high probability mode", and in this embodiment, the number of random numbers for the jackpot in the "low probability mode" is In one, the value is "7", and in the case of the "high probability mode", the number of the value of the random number serving as the jackpot is 10 and the value is "7 to 16". That is, in the "low probability mode", a winning lottery is won with a probability of 1/399 (a big hit state occurs), and in the "high probability mode", a winning lottery with a probability of 1 / 39.9 Become. These winning probabilities correspond to the first winning probability.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot success determination table which is referred to when it is determined whether or not the value of the per random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. In the present embodiment, there are two large hit / fail judgment tables, and there are a first big hit / fail judgment table storing “7” and a second big hit / fail judgment table storing “7 to 16”.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a small hit success / failure determination table which is referred to when it is determined whether the value of the random number counter C1 corresponds to the small hit. The number of small random numbers is 10, and the value is "101 to 110". That is, it will be won by the probability lottery with the probability of 1 / 39.9 (small hit state occurs). The winning probability corresponds to the second winning probability. Incidentally, the small hit success or failure table is referred to only in the winning or losing lottery due to the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A.

  The jackpot type determination counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and return to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 49). In the present embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter C2 gives any of jackpot types, that is, "16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R hour junior college hit" or "2R normal jackpot" Is to be determined.

  The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table which is referred to when it is determined which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 corresponds to. Also, as described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution of jackpot types differs between when the gaming ball has won the upper starting winning opening 33A and when the lower starting winning opening 33B has won. That is, in the present embodiment, there are two big hit type determination tables, and the first big hit type determination table to which the game ball participates when the game ball wins the upper start winning hole 33A, and the game ball to the lower start winning hole 33B There is a second jackpot type determination table referred to when winning a prize.

  Specifically, when the gaming ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33A, referring to the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 46), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "0 to 19" The grant of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined. Also, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "20 to 39", the assignment of "8R probability variation jackpot" is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "40", "2R probability variation jackpot The grant of "is decided. Furthermore, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "41 to 49", the assignment of "2R normal jackpot" is determined.

  That is, when winning a big hit lottery triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33A, it will be "16R probability variation jackpot" with a probability of 40%, "8R probability variation jackpot" with a 40% probability, 2% The probability is "2R probability variation jackpot", and the probability of 18% is "2R regular jackpot".

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball wins the lower start winning opening 33B, the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 47) is referred to, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is “0 to 39” The grant of 16R probability variation jackpot is determined, and if it is "40", the assignment of "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined, and if it is "41 to 49", the grant of "2R hour junior college hit" is determined.

  That is, in the case of winning the winning lottery triggered by the winning in the lower start winning opening 33B, it will be "16R probability variation jackpot" with a probability of 80%, "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 2% probability, 18% The probability is "2R hour junior high hit".

  The jackpot type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. The value of jackpot type determination counter C2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is the special variation reserve area of RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins in upper start winning opening 33A or lower start prize opening 33B. It is stored in the change pending area or the second special change pending area).

  Further, the reach selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (i.e., 238). In the present embodiment, after the reach for the symbol is generated by the reach selection counter C3, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped, and the final stop symbol after the reach is generated as well. It is decided to draw a lottery of “reach out other than out of front and back” and “complete out” in which reach does not occur. In the present embodiment, the reach determination table is referred to when the ROM 502 determines whether the value of the reach selection counter C3 is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach state and which reach corresponds. It is provided. In the reach determination table, values of "0 to 238" are stored, C3 = 0 and 1 correspond to the back and forth reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 22 to 238 is completely It has a configuration that corresponds to the disassembly.

  The reach selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter C3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. The value of reach selection counter C3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is the special fluctuation reserve area of RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A or the lower start winning opening 33B Stored in the area or the second special change pending area).

  Also, of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially added one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 198), and then it is the lower limit value. It is configured to return to 0, and the other variation type counter CS2 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 240, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 240). It has become. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter", and CS2 is also referred to as "second variation type counter". This is also described in FIG.

  For example, in the 16R probability variation big hit time / variation pattern table (see FIG. 48) according to the “normal effect mode” (when “playing state determination value Xj” described later is “1”), the first variation type counter CS1 The so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. reach types of symbols and other rough change modes are determined, and more detailed change modes such as change time are determined by the second change type counter CS2. Therefore, diversification of fluctuation patterns can be easily realized by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode or the like only by the first variation type counter CS1.

  In addition, normal reach is a reach pattern in which special effect display is not performed except for the change of the symbol. The super reach is a reach pattern in which a character or the like is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the symbol during the variable display of the symbol (after the reach state is established), and thereby the player has a sense of expectation. Premium reach is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of symbols (after reach state is established), characters etc. of patterns different from super reach are displayed in addition to the symbols This is a reach pattern that is performed in an aspect, thereby making the player have a sense of expectation.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. The buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation of the symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  Note that the size and range of each counter are merely an example and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the values of the per-random number counter C1, the reach selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 be different prime numbers and be values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Also, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the upper limit value (that is, reaches 9 and then to the lower limit value 0). The random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and when the gaming ball passes the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired.

  Then, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to the winning ("o" in this example) is stopped and displayed As a result, the motorized jack 37 of the lower start winning opening 33B is opened for a predetermined time.

  In the present embodiment, in the “low support mode”, the value of the random number to be won is one “0”. On the other hand, in the “high support mode”, eight random numbers “0 to 7” are won. That is, in the "low support mode", the motorized prize 37 is opened at a probability of 1/10, and in the "high support mode", the motorized prize 37 is opened at a probability of 4/5. These winning probabilities correspond to the third winning probability.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly classified into main processing activated upon turning on the power, timer interrupt processing activated periodically (in this embodiment, in 2 msec cycle), and stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). The NMI interrupt process is activated by the input of the above, and for convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the main process will be described.

  The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in backup area 503 a of RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SK1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control under execution to start the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503 a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

  The above NMI interrupt process is also executed by the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and the occurrence of power-off is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such an NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SK1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing. The contents are as described above.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 every 2 msec, for example. In the drawing, the timer interrupt process by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is given a code beginning with S3.

  In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, the processing for reading various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the status of various prize detection switches (prize port switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switches 224A and 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main control 261 is read, and the status of the switches is determined. Save the detection information.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is performed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (398 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the per random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2, the reach selection counter C3 and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1 and they are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the upper limit value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, the start winning process is performed in association with the winning on the start winning openings 33A and 33B, and in step S305, the through gate passing process in accordance with the passage of the gaming ball to the through gate 34 is performed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily ended.

  Here, the start winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S304-1, it is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224B whether or not the gaming ball has won the lower start winning opening 33B. When an affirmative determination is made in step S304-1, in step S304-2, the value of the lower hold counter Nb, which counts the number of pending variable displays triggered by winning in the lower starting winning opening 33B, is the upper limit value (this implementation In the form, it is determined whether it is less than "4". If a negative determination is made in step S304-2, the process proceeds to step S304-9. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S304-2, the process proceeds to step S304-3, and the lower hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S304-4, the values of the per-random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process of the above step S303 are compared with the vacant reserve area of the second special variation reserve area. In the first area of After step S304-4, the process proceeds to step S304-5.

  In step S304-5, a second hit determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special change reserving area is a value corresponding to a big hit. Here, the details of the second collision determination process of step S304-5 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S304-5-1, the value of the per random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation reserving area matches the value "7" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first jackpot determination table. It is determined whether to do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-5-1, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state occurs, the "jackpot winning flag" is turned on in step S304-5-2, and then the present process is ended. The "big hit winning flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of a big hit state.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-5-1, it is determined in step S304-5-3 whether or not the "high probability mode" is in progress based on the value of the "lottery mode flag". .

  The “lottery mode flag” is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is the “low probability mode” or the “high probability mode”. Further, in the present embodiment, the “lottery mode flag” is configured of 1 byte (8 bits), and “50” is set as the flag value when the lottery mode is “low probability mode”. In the case of the probability mode, "53" is set. The value "5" of the upper 4 bits in the "lottery mode flag" is one which is uniformly added for noise reduction, and is not for determining the game state in particular.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-5-3, that is, if the "high probability mode" is in effect, then in step S304-5-4, a random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation suspension area. Of the values corresponding to the jackpots stored in the second jackpot success / failure determination table, it is determined whether the value is any of “8 to 16” excluding “7”. In the determination process, it is determined one by one whether the value of the per-random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the big hit. Also, in the following, the process of determining whether a certain value (for example, counter value) matches any one of a plurality of values is basically described in one block in the figure. In the actual process, as described above, it is determined, one by one, whether a certain value matches any one of a plurality of values.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-5-4, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state occurs in the "high probability mode", the "big hit winning flag" is turned on in step S304-5-2. After this, this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S304-5-3 or step S304-5-4, this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in step S304-6 following step S304-5, if it is determined in step S304-5 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a big hit, a second special variation is newly made. A second jackpot type determination process of determining the type of jackpot is performed based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 stored in the reserve area.

  The second jackpot type determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second jackpot type determination process, first, in step S304-6-1, it is determined whether or not the "big hit election flag" is set in the second hit determination process S304-5 performed immediately before, and a negative determination is made. If it has been, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made, the second jackpot type determination table is referred to, and the type of jackpot is determined.

  Specifically, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special change reserving area at step S304-6-2 is a value "0 to 39" corresponding to "16R probability variation jackpot". It is determined whether there is any. Here, if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-6-3, the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-6-2, the process proceeds to step S304-6-4, and the value of jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variation suspension area is “ It is determined whether the value is "40" corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot". Here, when an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-6-5, the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and the present process is ended.

  Further, if the negative determination is made in step S304-6-4, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variation suspension area is a value “41” corresponding to “2R hourly junior high per chance”. Since it is considered that “50” is “50”, the “2R-time short jackpot flag” is turned on in step S304-6-6, and the present process is ended.

  The “16R probability variation big hit flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of “16R probability variation big hit”, and the “2R probability variation big hit flag” is the state determination for determining the occurrence of “2R probability variation big hit”. It is information, and the "2R hour short jackpot flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of "2R hour short jackpot".

  Referring back to FIG. 12, in step S304-7, if it is determined in step S304-5 that the value of the random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the big hit, it is newly stored in the second special variation hold area Based on the value of the reach selection counter C3, reach determination processing is performed to determine the type of reach.

  The reach determination process of step S304-7 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S304-7 (15) -1, it is determined whether or not the winning flag (“big hit winning flag” or “small hit winning flag” described later) is set in the big hit determination processing performed immediately before. Do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -1, that is, if a big hit state or a small hit state occurs, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -1, that is, when no hit state occurs, the reach determination table is referred to in step S304-7 (15) -2, and the second It is determined whether or not the value of the reach selection counter C3 stored in the special variation reserving area matches one of "0, 1" which is a value corresponding to "longitudinal outreach". When an affirmative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -2, in step S304-7 (15) -3, after setting the "back and forth deviation flag" indicating the occurrence of the back and forth deviation reach, this process is executed. finish.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -2, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S304-7 (15) -4 and newly stored in the second special variation suspension area. It is determined whether the value of the reach selection counter C3 matches one of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "reach other than front and back deviation". When an affirmative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -4, in step S304-7 (15) -5, the "other than back and forth deviation flag" indicating the occurrence of the reach other than the back and forth deviation reach is turned on. This process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -4, that is, if "complete removal" occurs, the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in step S304-8 subsequent to the reach determination process S304-7, a setting process of the hold control command is performed. The hold control command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the contents of the variable display) held in the second special change hold area. is there. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). The hold control command includes, for example, information indicating the result of the second collision determination process and the second jackpot type determination process as hold information, and information indicating variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B, etc. Is included.

  After the process of step S304-8, or when a negative determination is made in step S304-1 or step S304-2, it is determined in step S304-9 whether or not the gaming ball has won the upper starting winning opening 33A. The determination is made based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step S304-9, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step S304-10, the value of upper suspension counter Na which counts the number of suspension of variable display triggered by winning in upper start winning opening 33A is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment) It is determined whether it is less than "4". If a negative determination is made in step S304-10, the process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S304-10, the process proceeds to step S304-11, and the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In the following step S304-12, the values of the per-random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2 and the reach selection counter C3 are stored in the first free reserved area of the first special variation reserved area. After step S304-12, the process proceeds to step S304-13.

  In step S304-13, a first collision determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the per-random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special change reserving area is a value corresponding to a big or small hit. Here, the details of the first collision determination process of step S304-13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S304-13-1, the value of the per random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special change reserving area matches the value "7" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first jackpot determination table. It is determined whether to do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-13-1, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state occurs, the "big hit winning flag" is turned on in step S304-13-2, and then the process ends. In addition, a first special game state generation means is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that generates a big hit state corresponding to the first special game state in step S304-5-2 or step S304-13-2.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-13-1, the process proceeds to step S304-13-3, and whether or not the "high probability mode" is in progress based on the value of the "lottery mode flag" judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-13-3, that is, if the "high probability mode" is in progress, the process proceeds to step S304-13-4, and the random number is newly stored in the first special change suspension area. It is determined whether the value of the counter C1 is any one of "8 to 16" among the values corresponding to the jackpot stored in the second jackpot success / failure determination table, excluding the above "7".

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-13-4, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state occurs in the "high probability mode", the "big hit winning flag" is turned on in step S304-13-2. After this, this processing ends.

  In addition, the determination process of step S304-5-1, step S304-5-4, step S304-13-1 and step S304-13-4 constitutes a first success / failure lottery, and the main control device 261 that executes this process. The function constitutes a first lottery means.

  When a negative judging is carried out at Step S304-13-3 or Step S304-13-4, ie, when it is not a "big hit", it shifts to Step S304-13-5.

  In step S304-13-5, it is determined whether the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special change reserving area matches any of the values "101 to 110" corresponding to the small hitting. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-13-5, that is, if it is determined that a small hit state occurs, the "small hit selection flag" is turned on in step S304-13-6, and this process ends. Do. The "small hit selection flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of the small hit state.

  On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S304-13-5, this processing is ended as it is. In the present embodiment, the determination process of step S304-13-5 constitutes a second acceptance lottery, and the function of the main control device 261 that executes this constitutes a second lottery means. In addition, a second special game state generation means is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that generates a small hitting state corresponding to the second special game state in step S304-13-6.

  Referring back to FIG. 12, in the subsequent step S304-14, when it is determined in step S304-13 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, it is newly stored in the first special change suspension area A first jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2.

  The first jackpot type determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the first jackpot type determination process, first, in step S304-14-1, it is determined whether or not the "big hit winning flag" is set in the first hit determination process S304-13 performed immediately before, If it is determined, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made, the first jackpot type determination table is referred to, and the type of jackpot is determined.

  Specifically, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special change reserving area at step S304-14-2 is a value "0 to 19" corresponding to "16R probability variation jackpot". It is determined whether there is any. Here, when an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-14-3, the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-14-2, the process proceeds to step S304-14-4, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special change suspension area is “ It is determined whether it is any one of the values "20 to 39" corresponding to "8R probability variation jackpot". Here, if a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-14-5, the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and the present process is ended. The “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of “8R probability variation jackpot”.

  When a negative determination is made in step S304-14-4, the process proceeds to step S304-14-6. In step S304-14-6, it is determined whether or not the value of jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variation hold area is the value "40" corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot". . Here, if a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-14-7, the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and the present process is ended. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-14-6, the value of jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variation suspension area is a value “2R normal jackpot” corresponding to “2R Since it is considered that “41 to 50”, the “2R normal jackpot flag” is turned on in step S304-14-8, and the process ends. The “2R normal jackpot flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of “2R normal jackpot”.

  Referring back to FIG. 12, in the following step S304-15, if it is determined in step S304-13 that the value of the random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the big hit or the small hit, the first special variation reserved area is newly added. Based on the stored value of the reach selection counter C3, reach determination processing is performed to determine the type of reach. The reach determination process of step S304-15 is the same as the reach determination process of step S304-7, and the information to be compared is of the reach selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special variation suspension area. The only difference is that the value is not the value but the value of the reach selection counter C3 newly stored in the first special variation suspension area. Therefore, the detailed description of the reach determination process of step S304-15 is omitted.

  In the subsequent step S304-16, a setting process of the hold control command is performed. Thereafter, the process ends. The setting process of the hold control command in step S304-16 is the same as the setting process of the hold control command in step S304-8, and the information on the variable display to be processed is the upper start winning opening 33A. The only difference is that the ball is based on entering a ball, so the detailed description will be omitted for the sake of convenience.

  Returning to FIG. 11, following the start winning process of step S304, the through gate passing process of step S305 is performed. Next, the through gate passing process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S305-1, it is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225 whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 or not.

  If a negative determination is made in step S305-1, this process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S305-1, that is, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through gate 34, suspension of the variable display performed in normal symbol display device 41 in step S305-2 It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc that counts the number is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S305-2, that is, passage of the gaming ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed, and the process proceeds to step S305-3 on condition that the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4. The normal hold counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S305-4, a random number relating to the pass / fail is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of the step S303 is stored in the first free area of the normal change area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passage processing is ended.

  Next, the flow of the main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon power-on reset. In the drawing, the main processing by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is given a code beginning with S1.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power on is performed. Specifically, while setting a predetermined value to the stack pointer in advance and waiting for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, the RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed on the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply 313 is pressed (ON), and if pressed, the process proceeds to step S111 in order to clear (erase) the backup data. Do.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the setting is not made, the backup data is not stored, so the process also proceeds to step S111 in this case. If occurrence information of power-off is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to step S111 in this case.

  The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  In the process of step S111, an "initialization command" is transmitted to initialize the sub control device 262 and the payout control device 311, etc., which are control devices on the sub side. Incidentally, the sub control device 262 which has received the "initialization command" executes its own initialization processing as described later, and the value of the "playing state determination value Xj" corresponding to the "normal effect mode" which is the initial setting. "1" is stored in the gaming state storage area.

  The “playing state determination value Xj” is information indicating a rendering mode (rendering mode) on the display unit 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 and corresponds to mode information. Further, the “playing state determination value Xj” is set corresponding to each effect mode. In the present embodiment, the "gaming state determination value Xj" is set to "1" when the "normal effect mode" is selected, and is set to "2" when the "time reduction effect mode" is selected, and "latent" When it becomes the definite effect mode, it is set to "3", and when it becomes the "probable effect mode", it is set to "4".

  In the “normal effect mode”, for example, a plurality of normal effect mode stages in which a background image is preset (in the present embodiment, for example, a plurality of high-rise buildings are displayed as shown in FIG. 59) "Stage", as shown in FIG. 60, "park stage" in which trees, benches, etc. are displayed, as shown in FIG. 61, "suburb stage" in which a plurality of mountains etc. are displayed, etc. Be done. Also, in the "normal effect mode", the upper symbol display area occupies about 1/3 of the upper side of the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the middle symbol display area occupies about 1/3 of the center of the display portion 42a The symbol display area occupies about 1/3 of the lower part of the display unit 42a, and the symbol is configured to be variably displayed using almost the entire area of the display unit 42a.

  In the present embodiment, the stage displayed in the “normal effect mode” is configured to be selected by the sub control device 262. Specifically, when the “playing state determination value Xj” transmitted from the main control device 261 is “1”, the sub control device 262 arbitrarily selects and selects one of the above stages. The command related to the stage is transmitted to the display control device 45. Then, the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the received command, whereby a display corresponding to the selected stage is made on the decorative symbol display device 42. The stage displayed in the “normal effect mode” may be selected by the main control device 261. In this case, for example, a different “playing state determination value Xj” may be set for each stage (for example, “11” is set as the “playing state determination value Xj” in “the city center stage” and “park stage In "", "12" may be set as "gaming state determination value Xj", and "13" may be set as "gaming state determination value Xj" in "suburbs stage").

  The "time-saving effect mode" is an effect mode that is mainly performed in the variable display after the end of the "2R time-south hit". In the "time-saving effect mode", a predetermined time-shortening effect stage for which the background image is different from the background image in the "normal effect mode" (in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 81, display of the decorative symbol display device 42) In the section 42a, it is displayed that the character performs training, and is also referred to as a "training stage" in which characters such as "under training" are displayed. Furthermore, in the "time reduction effect mode", the symbol display area is provided smaller at a position away from the center of the display unit 42a (in the present embodiment, on the lower right side of the display unit 42a).

  Also, in the “time-saving effect mode”, information indicating the remaining number of changes to which the high support mode is given (for example, a number indicating the number of remaining changes or a meter whose scale decreases by one with the end of the change), Alternatively, information indicating the total number of times of change since entering the "time-saving effect mode" (for example, a number indicating the total number of changes occurring after entering the "time-short effect mode") is also displayed on the display unit 42a Be done. For example, in the present embodiment, the numerical value (numerical value between "remaining" and "day") displayed in the area partitioned by the thick line in the display unit 42a is the remaining fluctuation to which the "high support mode" is applied. Indicates the number of times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the “support number counter” described later is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 normally receives By controlling the display control device 45 based on the value of the number counter, the remaining number of changes is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. However, in the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, when “small hit” occurs in the “probability change effect mode”, the effect mode is set to “time reduction effect mode”, but in this case, the sub The number of receptions of the “variation pattern command” (that is, the number of fluctuations) after the “time reduction rendering mode” in the control device 262 is measured, and information corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is based on the number of measurements. can get. Then, the sub-control device 262 controls the display control device 45 based on this information, whereby dummy information corresponding to the remaining number of times of change is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. That is, when the "small hit" occurs in the "probability change effect mode", a value unrelated to the actual value of the "support number of times counter" is displayed as the remaining number of changes.

  The "support frequency counter" is a means for measuring the duration (the number of times of fluctuation display) of the "high support mode", and the value corresponding to various jackpots is a counter value in the processing after the jackpot end. Set as Further, the information representing the remaining number of changes and the like is not necessarily displayed, and can be omitted as appropriate.

  The “latency effect mode” is an effect mode that is mainly performed in the variable display after the end of “2R probability variation jackpot” or “small hit”. In the “latency production mode”, a stage for a predetermined latency presentation mode different from the background image in the “normal production mode” and the “time reduction production mode” (in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 76) The display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a situation in which a car carrying a character travels and displays a character such as "during business" or the like "operating stage" or the like. Further, in the “latency effect mode”, as in the “normal effect mode”, the symbol is variably displayed using almost the entire area of the display section 42a. Further, as described above, the transition to the "latency production mode" is performed not only at the end of the "2R probability variation jackpot" but also after the completion of the "small hit" or the "2R regular jackpot". Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" or the "low probability mode".

  The “probability change production mode” is a production mode performed in the variable display after the end of “8R probability change jackpot” or “16R probability change jackpot”. In the “probability variation effect mode”, a predetermined probability variation effect mode stage different from the background images in the “normal effect mode”, the “time reduction effect mode”, and the “latency effect mode” in the background image (in the present embodiment, for example, In the display section 42a, as shown in FIG. 1, a predetermined character is displayed, and a "break stage" or the like in which the "high probability mode" or the like is clearly displayed is displayed. . In the "probability change effect mode", as in the "time reduction effect mode", the symbol display area is provided smaller at a position deviated from the center of the display portion 42a.

  In addition, each presentation mode is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, It can change suitably. For example, the same stage may be displayed in each effect mode, and the color tone of the background image may be different in each effect mode (for example, in the “normal effect mode”, the background image is full color color arrangement) In the "time reduction effect mode", the background image is greenish in color, in the "latency effect mode" the background image is low in saturation (near black and white) in monotone coloration, and in the "probability change effect mode" It may be a reddish color scheme). Further, in the present embodiment, although the aspect of the symbol displayed in a variable manner is configured to be the same in each effect mode, the symbol in an aspect different from the symbols in the other effect modes in the specific effect mode May be displayed fluctuatingly.

  Returning to FIG. 9, after the process of step S111, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM (step S112 and the like).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, at the time of opening of the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S112 etc.). Further, when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.), the process similarly shifts to the initialization process (step S112 etc.) of the RAM 503. In step S112, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S113, an initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is set that the occurrence information of the power-off is set, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (step S103). The processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power failure recovery) is executed on condition of S104: YES, S106: YES). That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, the power-off occurrence information is cleared.

  In the subsequent step S109, a "return command" (for example, the "payout return command") for returning the sub control device 262 serving as the control device on the sub side and the payout control device 311 etc. to the gaming state at the time of power off is transmitted. The “return command” transmitted to the sub control device 262 includes “gaming state determination value Xj” which is information indicating an effect mode at the time of power off. The sub control device 262 is based on the "return command" including the "gaming state determination value Xj", the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 at the time of power off (in this embodiment, "normal effect mode", "time reduction effect It is possible to determine the mode, the "latency effect mode" or the "probability effect mode").

  In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S114, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the normal processing.

  Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, the processes of steps S201 to S210 are executed as periodic processes of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processes of steps S211 and S212 are executed with the remaining time. In the drawing, the normal processing by the main control unit 261 is given a code beginning with S2.

  First, in step S201, control signals based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the motor combination 37 etc. updated in the previous process are transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is sent to each sub side. Execute external output processing to be sent to the control device. Some specific examples are given below in more detail.

  For example, based on the detection information of the various detection switches, it is determined whether or not the game ball is to be won to the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, and if there is a winning, the winning balls corresponding to the number corresponding to the winning A payout command is sent to the payout control device 311.

  Further, a command including a “lottery mode flag” is output to the sub controller 262.

  Further, when a command for causing the error display lamp 104 to blink or the like is set, the command is output to the sub control device 262.

  Further, in the external output processing, various information such as the "lottery mode flag" and the "big hit flag" described later are taken into consideration, and information for causing the game state to be grasped is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall. Furthermore, the output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process. For example, when a winning error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall through a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and off when there is no winning error. A signal is output.

  In addition, at the time of variation display of symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42, the “variation pattern command”, “symbol command”, “ending command” described later, “round open command” described later, etc. are transmitted to the sub control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, to which the "variation pattern command", "symbol command", "ending command", "round open command", etc. are input, changes the decorative symbol display device 42 based on such various commands. The mode is determined, and an instruction is issued to the display control device 45 to display (variation display) the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. The function of executing the external output process (S201) in the main control device 261 constitutes a variation pattern command output means.

  In step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one and cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the upper limit (198 and 240 in the present embodiment), as in the other counters. Do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the following step S203, the winning ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, the first display control process is performed. In this process, the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are set as to what kind of control is to be performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the jackpot determination and the symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Setting of the fluctuation pattern of Here, the first display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S205-1, with reference to various hit medium flags ("big hit middle flag" and "small hit middle flag") described next, it is currently hit middle (in the big hit state or in the low hit state) It is determined whether or not.

  Note that the “big hit flag” is state determination information for determining whether or not a big hit state is in progress. In the present embodiment, the "big hit flag" is turned on ("1" is set as the flag value) when in the big hit state, and the "big hit flag" is turned off when not in the big hit state ( "0" is set as the flag value).

  The "small hit middle flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the small hit state is in progress. In the present embodiment, as in the case of the large hit middle flag, the "small hit middle flag" is turned on in the small hit state ("1" is set as the flag value), and the small hit state is not in effect. The "small hit middle flag" is turned off ("0" is set as the flag value).

  Note that the hit state (the big hit state and the small hit state) includes the middle of the hit state and a predetermined time after the end of the hit state. Here, the predetermined time after the end of the hit state is the time after the end of the hit state until the normal game (variation display on the special display devices 43L and 43R) is started, and this time slot is the decorative symbol display device At 42, the end of the hit state, various gaming states to be awarded after the hit, and displays (ending effect) indicating various modes are performed. In addition, a period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 in a mode corresponding to a hit, until the variable winning device 32 is opened [generally, this time A band is included in the hit for the display (opening effect) indicating the start of the hit state on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-1, that is, if a hit state is in progress, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S205-1, in step S205-2, the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol) is checked by looking at the setting status of the "first display flag". It is determined whether or not variable display is in progress on the display device 42). Specifically, when the "first display flag" is set (in the case of the on state), it is considered as being in the variable display, and when the "first display flag" is released (in the case of the off state) Is considered to be in the stop display corresponding to the state in which the variable display is stopped.

  The “first display flag” is state determination information for determining whether or not variable display is being performed by the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. In the present embodiment, when the first or second special display device 43L, 43R is in the variable display mode, the “first display flag” is turned on (“1” is set as the flag value), and When the variable display is not being performed on the 1 or 2 special display devices 43L and 43R, the "first display flag" is turned off ("0" is set as the flag value). Also, the "first display flag" is turned on when the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R start variable display (see steps S205-7 and S205-7-27), and the first display flag is turned on. And when the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step S205-14).

  If a negative determination is made in step S205-2, that is, if it is not in the hit state nor in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S205-3, and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B (the (2) It is determined whether the value of the lower hold counter Nb for counting the number of holds of (variation display) is larger than 0 or not.

  If a positive determination is made in step S205-3, that is, if at least one second variation display is stored pending, 1 is subtracted from the lower storage counter Nb in step S205-4. In the present embodiment, when the second variable display is stored on hold (that is, when the determination in step S205-3 is affirmative), the second variable display is stored regardless of the presence or absence of the reserved storage in the first variable display. The process (S205-4 to S205-6) which concerns on 2 fluctuation | variation display will be performed. In other words, even if the first variable display is reserved and stored earlier than the second variable display, the process related to the second variable display is preferentially digested (the first variable display is delayed) ) It is the composition.

  In the following step S205-5, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the second special variation reserved area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas for suspension in the second special variation suspension area toward the execution area, and the first area for suspension → the execution area, the second for suspension Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, and so on. After step S205-5, in step S205-6, after the process of turning on / off the second holding lamp 46b and the process of lighting the variation identification lamp 40 in red, the process proceeds to step S205-7.

  When a negative determination is made in step S205-3, that is, when at least one second change display is not stored pending, a change triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33A in step S205-8. It is determined whether or not the upper hold counter Na, which counts the number of holds of display (first variable display), is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S205-8, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S205-8, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step S205-9. In the following step S205-10, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the first special variation hold area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the first special variation reserved area to the execution area side, and the first reserved area → the execution area, the second reserved area Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, and so on. After step S205-10, in step S205-11, after the process of turning on / off the first holding lamp 46a and the process of emitting the variation identification lamp 40 in blue, the process proceeds to step S205-7. In the present embodiment, there is one execution area of the special fluctuation reserve area, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation reserve area and the second special fluctuation reserve area is subjected to the fluctuation display based on the data Will be shifted to a common execution area.

  In step S205-7, variable display setting processing is performed. In the variable display setting process, a "variable pattern command" and a "symbol command" are set. Therefore, prior to the description of the variation display setting process, the "variation pattern command" and the "symbol command" will be described.

  The “variation pattern command” is a command controlled by the sub-control device 262 for determining the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 42, such as the appearance and the variation mode of the symbol, and is stored in the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 502. Set based on. More specifically, in the present embodiment, as the variation pattern table, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to (h), the variation pattern table corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot”, and the variation pattern corresponding to “8R probability variation jackpot” Corresponds to the table, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot", the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R hour junior high jackpot", the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit", "back and forth reach" Fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than back and forth deviation", and the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "completely out" respectively the effect mode ("gaming state judgment value Xj" value "1" to "4 That is, “normal production mode”, “time reduction production mode”, “latency production mode” and “probability change production” It provided with a plurality, depending on the over-de "). In FIG. 49, for convenience of illustration, it corresponds to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to “2R probability variation jackpot”, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to “2R hour and day jackpot”, and “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit”. Although the fluctuation pattern table is described separately, actually, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot" and "2R normal" when "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" It is common to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "big hit" or "small hit". In addition, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R hour and time jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" when "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4" Table is common.

  Then, steps S205-7-4, S205-7-7, S205-7-10, S205-7-13, S205-7-18, S205-7-22, and S205-7, which will be described later, are performed. When determining the variation pattern at -25, a process of selecting a variation pattern table corresponding to the effect mode (value of "playing state determination value Xj") from the plurality of table groups is performed. Then, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table, and a "variation pattern command" corresponding to this is set. The ROM 502 which stores the fluctuation pattern table constitutes fluctuation pattern storage means in the present embodiment.

  The “variation pattern command” in the present embodiment has a 2-byte configuration, and the upper 4 bits in the upper byte are configured by information specifying the effect mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of the “playing state determination value Xj” is set as it is. Also, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured with information that identifies a hit type (type of big hit or small hit) and the like, and the 8 bits of the lower byte are information that identifies a change pattern (such as change time or reach type) It is composed of

  The sub control device 262 stores the relationship between these "variation pattern command" and the variation aspect (variation pattern) of the symbol in a table, and when the "variation pattern command" is received, the "variation pattern command" is stored. The variation pattern (rendering pattern) corresponding to “” can be executed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The “variation pattern command” is not limited to the above configuration. For example, in order to reduce the processing load on the main control device 261, the "variation pattern command" is made up of 1 byte, and the upper 4 bits are made up of information specifying the effect mode (the value of "gaming state determination value Xj") , And the lower 4 bits may be configured by information for identifying the type and the like. Further, in this case, the sub control device 262 is provided with a table storing the relationship of the variation patterns of a plurality of symbols corresponding to one “variation pattern command”, and the sub table is referred to. The control device 262 may be configured to select / determine fluctuation patterns (such as fluctuation time and reach type).

  Next, "symbol command" will be described. The “symbol command” is a command for causing the sub control device 262 to determine the stop symbol. In this embodiment, the combination of odd jackpot symbols, the combination of even jackpot symbols, the combination of back and forth symbols, the combination of back and forth symbols, the combination of completely out symbols, the special symbol in the middle symbol display area It is a combination of symbols displayed when a combination of symbols displayed (that is, when "2R probability variation jackpot" occurs, or when "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs in a specific rendering mode, , Sometimes referred to simply as "special symbol" in the figure, when a combination of prescribed symbols (ie, when "2R time short hit" occurs, Alternatively, seven categories of "combination of symbols when 2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occur in a specific effect mode are designated. These categories are indicated, for example, by "B1", "B2", "B3", "B4", "B5", "B6", "B7", and any one of these is set as "symbol command". Be done. On the other hand, in the sub control device 262, the relationship between these "symbol commands" and the stop symbols is stored in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol command".

  The combination of odd jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of Zoromes with numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 and "B1" is displayed in "symbol command" corresponding to the combination of odd jackpot symbols. It is set. Then, the sub-control device 262 is configured such that, when “B1” indicating an odd jackpot symbol is set to “symbol command”, the combination of symbols consisting of Zorozu numbers of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 Determine one of the symbols as a stop symbol.

  The combination of even jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of Zoromes of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 and "B2" is in "symbol command" corresponding to the combination of even jackpot symbols It is set. Then, when the sub-control device 262 sets "B2" indicating an even big hit symbol to "symbol command", among the combinations of symbols consisting of Zoro eyes of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 Determine one of the symbols as a stop symbol.

  The combination of the front and back outset design corresponds to the “front and back out of reach reach” where the final stop design is shifted by one before and after the reach design after reaching reach and corresponds to the combination of front and back outset design "B3" is set to "symbol command".

  The combination of symbols other than front and back is corresponding to "reach other than back and forth" where the final stop symbol stops other than back and forth of the reach symbol after reach is generated, corresponding to the combination of non front and back not connected symbols "B4" is set for the symbol command.

  The combination of completely out of pattern designs corresponds to "completely out of position" in which reach does not occur, and "B5" is set in the "pattern command" corresponding to the combination of completely out of pattern designs.

  In addition, a combination of symbols (a combination of special symbols) in which a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area is special as a final stop symbol (a symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area) after reach is generated. The symbol is displayed in a stopped state. As shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 50, the combination of special symbols is “2R probability variation jackpot”, and “play status determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (that is, “normal effect” It corresponds to "2R normal jackpot" and "small hit" in the mode "" or "latency production mode", and "B6" is set to this symbol command.

  After the reach occurs, the combination of the prescribed symbols (In addition, this reach is displayed as an effect, and the symbol displayed at the time of reach and the final stop symbol have nothing to do with each symbol display area.) The predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed (in this example, the symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "2", "4" and "6" in order from the top as described above) . As shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 50, the combination of the prescribed symbols is “2R hour junior high hit” and “playing state judgment value Xj” is “2” or “4” (that is, “time saving effect It corresponds to "2R normal jackpot" and "small hit" in the mode "" or "probability change effect mode", and "B7" is set to this symbol command.

  Although details will be described later, when “B3” to “B5” are set in “design command”, the sub control device 262 selects the combination of the symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determined as a stop symbol.

  Specifically, when "B3" indicating a combination of front and back symbols is set to "symbol command", the sub control device 262 that has received the "symbol command" stores it in the back and forth reach reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. Determine the combination of symbols corresponding to the front and back out of reach reach as a stop symbol.

  Also, when "B4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front and back is set to "symbol command", the sub control device 262 that has received the "symbol command" is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than back and forth of the RAM 553. The combination of the symbols corresponding to the reach except for the front and back deviation is decided as the stop symbol.

  Furthermore, when "B5" indicating a combination of completely out symbols is set to "symbol command", the sub-control device 262 that has received the "symbol command" is completely stored in the completely out pattern buffer of the RAM 553. Determine the combination of the symbols corresponding to the detachment as the stop symbol.

  Further, when “B6” is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines a combination of symbols in which a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area as the stop symbol. In addition, the sub control device 262 is a symbol of the upper symbol display area and a symbol of the lower pattern display region, the symbol of the upper symbol display area stored in the back and forth reach reach symbol buffer or the reach symbol buffer other than the offset, And, the symbol in the symbol display area shown below is displayed.

  Furthermore, when "B7" is set to "design command", the sub control device 262 selects a combination of prescribed symbols as a combination of symbols.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process of step S205-7 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-7-1, it is determined whether the "small hit selection flag" is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-1, that is, if it is determined that the variable display corresponds to "small hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-16. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-7-1, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not correspond to "small hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-2.

  In step S205-7-2, it is determined whether the "big hit winning flag" is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, if it is determined that the variable display corresponds to "big hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-3. On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not correspond to "big hit" or "small hit", that is, it is out of order. The process proceeds to step S205-7-17.

  In step S205-7-3, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to "16R probability variation jackpot" by determining whether the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is on.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-3, that is, when the variable display corresponds to "16R probability variation jackpot", it corresponds to "16R probability variation jackpot" in step S205-7-4. The variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table, and is set in the “variation pattern command”. Subsequently, "symbol command" is set in step S205-7-5. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol (in the present embodiment, whether it is an odd symbol or an even symbol) is determined with reference to the symbol table corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot” stored in the ROM 502, and “corresponding to this A symbol command "(" B1 "or" B2 "in this embodiment) is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-3, the process proceeds to step S205-7-6, and it is determined whether or not the "8R probability variation big hit flag" is on, whereby the variation display is "8R probability variation It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the "big hit".

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-6, that is, if the variable display corresponds to "8R probability variation jackpot," "8R probability variation jackpot" is supported in step S205-7-7. The variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table to be set, and is set in the “variation pattern command”. Subsequently, "symbol command" is set in step S205-7-8. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol (in the present embodiment, whether it is an odd symbol or an even symbol) is determined by taking into consideration the symbol table corresponding to “8R probability variation jackpot” stored in the ROM 502, and “corresponding to this A symbol command "(" B1 "or" B2 "in this embodiment) is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the “design command” set for “16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot” is not clearly distinguished by the type of jackpot, and is common Can be set. In other words, the relationship between the stop symbol and the jackpot type is clear, as in the case of "16R probability variation big hit" the "odd symbol" is stopped and displayed, and in the case of "8R probability variation big hit" the "even symbol" is stopped and displayed. It is not necessarily associated with That is, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds given during the jackpot can not be determined depending on the type of the symbol displayed stopped in the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, for example, if it is "16R probability variation big hit", it may be easy to be stopped and displayed by "odd symbol" by the above-mentioned each symbol table, and it may set up so that the appearance rate of symbols may differ according to classification of each big hit. Also, for example, at the time of "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot", the stop symbol may be selected based on one symbol table regardless of the jackpot type.

  If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-6, the process proceeds to step S205-7-9, and it is determined whether the "2R probability variation big hit flag" is on or not, so that the variation display is "2R probability variation". It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the "big hit".

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-9, that is, if the variable display corresponds to "2R probability variation big hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-10 to handle "2R probability variation big hit". The variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table to be set, and is set in the “variation pattern command”. Thereafter, in step S205-7-11, a "symbol command" (in the present embodiment, "B6") that causes the combination of special symbols to be displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. Do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-9, the process proceeds to step S205-7-12, and it is determined whether or not the “2R hour short / big hit flag” is on, whereby the variable display is “2R hour short It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the "big hit". If a positive determination is made in step S205-7-12, that is, if the variable display corresponds to "2R hour shorts hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-13 to handle "2R time shorts hit". The variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table to be set, and is set in the “variation pattern command”. Thereafter, in step S205-7-14, a "symbol command" (in the present embodiment, "B7") that causes the combination of the prescribed symbols to be displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. Do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-12, the process proceeds to step S205-7-15, and it is determined whether or not the "2R normal jackpot flag" is on, whereby the variable display is "2R It is determined whether or not it corresponds to “normal jackpot”. When an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-15, that is, when the variable display corresponds to "2R normal jackpot", an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-1 (a variable display is displayed. If it corresponds to "small hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-16. On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S205-7-15, that is, although the "big hit winning flag" is turned on, the "16 probability variation big hit flag", the "8R probability variation big hit flag", etc. If none of the jackpot flags of the above has been turned on, the present processing ends.

  In step S205-7-16, whether or not the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3", that is, whether the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latency effect mode" Determine if If the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S205-7-16: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-7-10, and "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" The variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to 、, and is set in the “variation pattern command”. Thereafter, in step S205-7-11, a "symbol command" (in the present embodiment, "B6") that causes the combination of special symbols to be displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. Do. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit” occurs. In addition, the "variation pattern command" is set from the common variation pattern table, and the same "symbol command" is set. Therefore, when "2R probability variation big hit", "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs in "normal production mode" or "latency production mode", depending on the variation pattern of the symbol or the stop symbol, "2R It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a "permanent variation big hit" or "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" [However, "2R probability variation" in the "latency production mode" of the "high probability mode" If a "big hit" occurs, the effect after stopping the symbol (such as a big hit or middle effect) differs from the effect when "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs, so based on this effect, the hit type is determined It is distinguishable].

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-7-16 (that is, if the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4"), the process proceeds to step S205-7-13. The variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit”, and is set to “variation pattern command”. Thereafter, in step S205-7-14, a "symbol command" (in the present embodiment, "B7") that causes the combination of the prescribed symbols to be displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. Do. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", "2R time junior high hit", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs. At the same time, the "variation pattern command" is set from the common variation pattern table, and the same "symbol command" is set. Therefore, in the "time reduction effect mode" or the "probability change effect mode", when "2R time shorts big hit", "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs, depending on the variation pattern of the symbol or the stop symbol, the hit type It can not be determined.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in step S205-7-2 is negative, that is, if it is "out", it is determined in step S205-7-17 whether or not the "back and forth deviation flag" is on. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-17, that is, when the variable display corresponds to "longitudinal reach", fluctuation corresponding to "longitudinal reach" in step S205-7-18. The variation pattern is determined with reference to the pattern table, and set in the “variation pattern command”. Subsequently, at step S205-7-19, the "back and forth deviation flag" is turned off. Furthermore, in step S205-7-20, "symbol command" (in the present embodiment, "B3") corresponding to the front and back sides is set, and then, the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  If a negative determination is made in step 205-7-17, it is determined in step S205-7-21 whether or not the "other than front / rear deviation flag" is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-21, that is, if the variable display corresponds to "reach other than back and forth," "reach other than back and forth" in step S205-7-22. The variation pattern is determined with reference to the corresponding variation pattern table, and set in the “variation pattern command”. Subsequently, in step S205-7-23, the "other than front / rear deviation flag" is turned off. Further, in step S205-7-24, a symbol command ("B4" in the present embodiment) corresponding to a symbol other than the front and back deviation is set, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  Also, if the determination in step S205-7-21 is negative, that is, if the variable display corresponds to "complete out", the change corresponding to "complete out" in step S205-7-25. The variation pattern is determined with reference to the pattern table, and set in the “variation pattern command”. Subsequently, in step S205-7-26, "symbol command" ("B5" in this embodiment) corresponding to the completely detached symbol is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  The "variation pattern command" and the "symbol command" set as described above are output in the above-described external output process (step S201). Then, the sub-control device 262 to which these commands are input determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command and displays (variation display) the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. To the display control unit 45.

  In step S205-7-27, start setting processing is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R are satisfied. In the start setting process, the "first display flag" is turned on, and the "first display timer" is set.

  The “first display timer” is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is used to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation display. Be done.

  In the present embodiment, the time set for the “first display timer” (the fluctuation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R) is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the symbol selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Be done. In the case where the control signal indicating that the variable display is to be started is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output process (step S201) of the next normal process based on the setting of such "first display timer" The variable display is started on the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  Returning to FIG. 19, if the determination in step S205-2 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S205-12, and the first display timer subtraction process is performed. In the first display timer subtraction process, the value of the "first display timer" is decremented by one. As described above, since the normal process including the first display control process of step S205 is performed every 4 msec, when the “first display flag” is on, the “first display timer” is generated every 4 msec. The value will be reduced by one. Therefore, for example, in the case where the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set to the “first display timer” in step S205-7-27.

  Subsequently, in step S205-13, it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of the “first display timer” after the above subtraction. When the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S205-13.

  On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S205-13, that is, when the value of the "first display timer" is larger than 0, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S205-17. The switching display setting is performed to continue the process, and the process ends. Incidentally, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that switching display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R. As a result, the switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control processing, that is, every 4 msec.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S205-13, the "first display flag" is canceled (turned off) in step S205-14, and stop display on special display devices 43L and 43R in step S205-15. Set the stop display to do. Incidentally, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed is outputted to the special display devices 43L and 42R. For example, in the case of “16R probability variation jackpot”, “9−” is stopped (for example, lit for only a few seconds).

  After the stop display setting is performed in step S205-15, the variation end time setting process is performed in step S205-16, and the process ends. Next, the change end setting process of step S205-16 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-16-1, the "big hit winning flag" is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether the stop display corresponds to the "big hit". Here, when it corresponds to "the jackpot", it transfers to step S205-16-2 and performs jackpot setting processing. Then, after the end of step S205-16-2, the variation end time setting process is ended. In the jackpot setting process, the process for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform "opening effect" between the stop of the variable display and the start of the special prize state, and the opening time of the variable winning device 32 are controlled. Subsequently to the "representation", the processing necessary for starting the special prize state is performed. Specifically, in the jackpot setting process, a setting process of the "big hit flag", the "remaining open number counter", the "specified number K1", the "opening wait timer" and the "opening command" are performed. Next, the jackpot setting process of step S205-16-2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-16-2-1, it is determined whether the "16R probability variation big hit flag" is on. Here, if the “16R probability variation big hit flag” is on (S205-16-2-1: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-2, and the opening / closing pattern control table is referred to Set "15" as the initial value in the "remaining open number counter".

  In the open / close pattern control table, as shown in FIG. 51, the “remaining open number counter” corresponding to the number of occurrences of the special prize state (in the case of a small hit, the maximum number of occurrences of the special prize state) The initial value, the maximum value of the open time of the opening and closing plate 32b in each special award state (each round), the interval time between each special award state, and the like are set in advance.

  Further, the "remaining open number counter" is state determination information for determining the remaining number of the special prize state executed during the big hit state or the small hit state, that is, the remaining number of open / close processing of the variable winning device 32. . Note that the initial value of the "remaining free number counter" is one less than the number of special prize states in the hit state (the maximum number of times for small hits) even when the "remaining free number counter" is 0. , And the variable winning device 32 is opened.

  After step S205-16-2-2, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-3. According to the open / close pattern control table, per one open / close operation of the open / close plate 32b in the jackpot state (single award state) The predetermined number K1 which is the maximum number of scheduled winnings to the variable winning device 32 is set. As described above, the prescribed number K1 is previously determined for each open type (operation mode of the opening and closing plate 32b related to one opening and closing operation) such as “long open” or “short open”. In step S205-16-2-3, "10" corresponding to "long release" is set as the prescribed number K1.

  After setting the prescribed number K1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-4, and the "opening command" corresponding to "16R probability variation jackpot" is set with reference to the opening command table (see FIG. 52).

  In the opening command table, the "playing state determination value Xj" currently set and the "opening command" set when a hit occurs in the "lottery mode" are stored for each type of each hit. There is. Then, the setting process of the "opening command" corresponds to the "opening command" corresponding to the opening command table based on the "game state determination value Xj", the "lottery mode", various "big hit flags" and "small hit winning flags". It is made by selecting "."

  Further, the "opening command" is output to the sub control device 262 in order to cause the "opening effect" to be performed between the stop of the variable display and the start of the special prize state on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is The relationship between the "opening command" and the opening effect is stored in a table in the sub controller 262, and when the sub controller 262 receives the "opening command", display control is performed based on the received "opening command". The apparatus 45 is controlled, and as a result, an opening effect corresponding to the received "opening command" is executed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  Further, in the “opening effect”, for example, an effect indicating the type of the special prize state to be started after the “opening effect” or an action in which the player shoots the gaming ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (“ A presentation that recommends “right-handed strike”, a presentation corresponding to a transition to the “latency production mode” or a “time reduction presentation mode”, and the like are performed.

  In the present embodiment, “opening presentation” includes “16R probability variation opening presentation”, “8R probability variation opening presentation”, “latency opening presentation”, and “time-shortening opening presentation”.

  The “16 R probability variation opening presentation” is a presentation (this book showing that a positive result was obtained in the last reach presentation (in the present embodiment, for example, a presentation in which a predetermined character shows off a genius to the audience)) In the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 99, the audience receives a genius, the audience seat is covered in laughter, and as shown in FIG. 100, an effect in which a delighting character etc. is displayed is performed. It is an effect following the stop display of the symbol, and as shown in FIGS. 62 to 65, a series of effects after the change stop [in the present embodiment, for example, it can make the audience laugh and the curtain is closed while popular Following the effect, a predetermined character (see FIG. 65) is displayed], and then a predetermined display (for example, FIG. 6) indicating that "16R probability variation jackpot" is made. Is a production which reference) is carried out. In the case of executing the “16R probability variation opening presentation”, “AA” is set as the “opening command”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, characters that do not appear at the time of “8R probability variation jackpot” are displayed at “16R probability variation jackpot” and, as shown in FIG. 66, the “super” character is in front of the jackpot characters. As it is displayed, the player can know that the player has won the “16R probability variation jackpot”.

  As shown in FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, “8R probability variation opening presentation” is followed by presentation that indicates that a positive result was obtained in the last reach presentation, and then the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. It is an effect, and a predetermined display (refer to FIG. 67) which clearly indicates that it is “8R probability variation jackpot” is performed following the series of effects (FIGS. 62 to 64). In addition, the character (FIG. 65) displayed at the time of "16R probability variation jackpot" is not displayed at "8R probability variation jackpot", and as shown in FIG. 67, the character of "super" is displayed in front of the jackpot character. Therefore, the player can know that the player has won the “8R probability variation jackpot”. In the case of executing the “8R probability variation corresponding opening presentation”, “AB” is set as the “opening command”. In addition, the effect before the display (see FIG. 67) clearly indicating that it is "8R probability variation jackpot" among the opening production of "8R probability variation jackpot" is among the opening effects of "16R probability variation jackpot" , It is the same as the effect before the character (see FIG. 65) appears. That is, in the “8R probability variation big hit” and the “16R probability variation big hit”, the first half of the opening effect is common, and it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to create the effect and reduce the data capacity on the device side.

  The “latency opening effect” is an effect to be executed when “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit” occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 73, it is displayed in the middle symbol display area An effect as if the special symbol ZS being operated is performed (for example, an effect as if the telephone is vibrating or an effect as a ringing tone of the telephone flows from the speaker SP) is performed. In the case of executing the “latency opening presentation”, “AC” is set as the “opening command”. In addition, since the special symbol displayed at the time of the change stop is continuously displayed as it is from the change stop to the opening effect, in the decorative symbol display device 42, a continuous effect is performed from the change stop to the opening effect .

  The “time-shortening corresponding opening effect” is an effect to be executed when the “2R hourly junior high jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit” occurs, and, for example, the last reach effect (for example, predetermined for the audience In the present embodiment, the character has a negative result (in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 109, the audience is not subjected to comics, and the audience seats are quietly enclosed), and then the prescribed symbols are displayed. This is an effect (in the present embodiment, for example, an effect in which a disappointing character or the like is displayed as shown in FIG. 78) that follows the stop display of the combination of. When the "time-shortening corresponding opening effect" is to be executed, "AD" is set as the "opening command".

  Referring back to FIG. 22, in the setting process of the "opening command" in step S205-16-2-4, since the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is on, "AA" is set as the "opening command".

  Subsequent to step S205-16-2-4, in step S205-16-2-5, a "wait for release" is set. The "opening waiting timer" is information used to wait for the opening / closing start of the opening / closing plate 32b in order to open / close the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 after the end of the opening effect. The "opening waiting timer" is configured to set a predetermined value in accordance with the "opening command", that is, in accordance with the duration time of the opening effect. For example, in the case where the duration of the opening effect in the “16R probability variation big hit” is 30 seconds (30000 msec), “7500” is set for the “opening waiting timer” in step S205-16-2-5.

  After setting the "release waiting timer", the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-6, and the setting processing of the "release waiting flag" is performed. The "waiting for opening" is state determination information used to determine whether or not the opening and closing process of the opening and closing plate 32b in the hit state is open and closed when the "opening wait flag" is turned off. Processing becomes possible.

  After step S205-16-2-6, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-7, and the "return flag" is turned off. The "return flag" changes the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from "time reduction effect mode" to "probability effect mode" which is an effect mode clearly indicating that the "high probability mode" is selected. It is state determination information for determining whether or not processing (return processing) is to be performed, and "return processing" can be executed when the "return flag" is on. The "return flag" is turned off in step S205-16-2-7 when various "big hit" occurs while the "return flag" is on and execution of the "return processing" is scheduled. To cancel the execution of the "return process". After the "return flag" is turned off, the "big hit flag" setting process is performed in step S205-16-2-8, and this process ends.

  In step S205-16-2-1, when the "16R probability variation big hit flag" is off (S205-16-2-1: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-9. It is determined whether or not the 8R probability variation jackpot flag is on. Here, if the "8R probability variation big hit flag" is on (S205-16-2-9: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-10, and the opening / closing pattern control table is referred to, " Set "7" as the initial value in the "remaining open number counter".

  Following step S205-16-2-10, in step S205-16-2-11, setting of the specified number K1 is performed with reference to the open / close pattern control table. In step S205-16-2-11, "10" corresponding to "long release" is set as the prescribed number K1.

  After setting the specified number K1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-12, and the setting process of the "opening command" corresponding to "8R probability variation jackpot" is performed with reference to the opening command table. In step S205-16-2-12, since the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on, "AB" is set as the "opening command".

  Next to step S205-16-2-12, in step S205-16-2-13, an "opening waiting timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect of "8R probability variation jackpot" is set. For example, in the case where the duration of the opening effect in “8R probability variation big hit” is 20 seconds (20000 msec), “5000” is set to the “opening waiting timer” in step S205-16-2-13.

  After setting of the release waiting timer, processing for setting the release waiting flag in step S205-16-2-6, off processing of the return flag in step S205-16-2-7, and step S205-16 The "big hit flag" setting process in -2-8 is performed, and the process ends.

  In step S205-16-2-9, when the "8R probability variation big hit flag" is off (S205-16-2-9: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-14. It is determined whether or not the 2R probability variation jackpot flag is on. Then, if the "2R probability variation big hit flag" is on (S205-16-2-14: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-15, and the "remaining pattern control table" is referred to. Set "1" as an initial value to the open number counter.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-16, and the setting process of the specified number K1 is performed with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table. In step S205-16-2-16, "3" corresponding to "short release" is set as the prescribed number K1.

  After setting the prescribed number K1, the process proceeds to S205-16-2-17, and "AC" is set as the "opening command" in the "2R probability variation jackpot".

  Subsequent to step S205-16-2-17, in step S205-16-2-18, the "opening waiting timer" corresponding to the continuation time of the opening effect when "AC" is set as the "opening command" is It is set. For example, in the case where the duration of the opening effect when the "opening command" is "AC" is 5 seconds (5000 msec), "1250" for the "opening wait timer" in step S205-16-2-18. Is set.

  After the setting of the "waiting-for-opening timer", the processing of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 is performed, and this processing ends.

  Now, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-2-14, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-19, and it is determined whether or not the "2R hour minor hit flag" is on. If the "2R hour short jackpot flag" is on (S205-16-2-19: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-20, and the "remaining open number" with reference to the open / close pattern control table. Set "1" as the initial value to "Counter".

  Next, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-21, and setting processing of the defined number K1 is performed with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table. In step S205-16-2-21, "3" corresponding to "short release" is set as the prescribed number K1.

  After setting the prescribed number K1, the process proceeds to S205-16-2-22, and "AD" is set as the "opening command" in the "2R hour junior high hit".

  After step S205-16-2-22, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-23, and the "opening waiting timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AD" is set as the "opening command". Is set. For example, in the case where the duration of the opening effect when the “opening command” is “AD” is 5 seconds (5000 msec), “1250” for the “opening waiting timer” in step S205-16-2-23. Is set.

  After the setting of the "waiting-for-opening timer", the processing of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 is performed, and this processing ends.

  Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-2-19, that is, if "2R normal jackpot" occurs, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-24 and the open / close pattern control table is referred to. Then, "1" is set as the initial value in the "remaining open number counter".

  Next, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-25, and setting processing of the defined number K1 is performed with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table. In step S205-16-2-25, "3" corresponding to "short release" is set as the prescribed number K1.

  Next, setting processing of the "opening command" corresponding to "2R normal jackpot" is performed. The "opening command" set when the "2R normal jackpot" occurs may be different depending on the "playing state determination value Xj" (ie, the effect mode) at the time of the occurrence. Therefore, prior to the setting process of the "opening command" in the "2R normal jackpot", the process of determining the "gaming state determination value Xj" is performed.

  Specifically, after step S205-16-2-25, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-26, and it is determined whether "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". Do. Here, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S205-16-2-26: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-17, and “opening command” "AC" is set as "." That is, when the production mode is the "normal production mode" or the "latency production mode", the same "opening command" set when the "2R probability variation big hit" occurs is set as the "opening command". Be done. Then, in step S205-16-2-18, an "opening wait timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AC" is set as the "opening command" is set. Thereafter, the processing of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 is performed, and the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the "gaming state determination value Xj" is neither "1" nor "3" (S205-16-2-26: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-22, " "AD" is set as the opening command. That is, when the effect mode is the "time reduction effect mode" or the "probability change effect mode", the "opening command" is set to the same "opening command" set when the "2R time short hit" occurs. Ru. Then, in step S205-16-2-23, the "opening wait timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AD" is set as the "opening command" is set. Thereafter, the processing of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 is performed, and the present processing ends.

  Returning to the change end setting process of FIG. 21, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-3, and the "small hit selection flag" is referred to, and stop display is performed. It is determined whether or not corresponds to the "small hit". Here, when corresponding to "small hit", it transfers to step S205-16-4 and performs small hit setting processing. Then, after the end of step S205-16-4, the variation end time setting process is ended. In the small hitting setting process, the process for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform "opening effect" between the stop of the variable display and the start of the special prize state, and the opening time of the variable winning device 32 are controlled. Following the opening presentation, the processing necessary for starting the award state is performed. Specifically, in the small hitting setting process, a setting process of "small hitting middle flag", "remaining released number counter", "maximum winable number M1", "opening waiting timer" and "opening command" are performed. Next, the small hit setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-16-4-1, with reference to the open / close pattern control table, the initial value of the "remaining open number counter" at the time of small hitting is set. In the present embodiment, "1" is set as the initial value in the "remaining open number counter".

  Subsequent to step S205-16-4-1, in step S205-16-4-2, with reference to the open / close pattern control table, the maximum number of possible winnings M1 is set. The maximum winning possible number M1 is the maximum total number of gaming balls that can enter the variable winning device 32 in the small hitting state, and is stored in advance in the open / close pattern control table. In the present embodiment, “10” is set as the maximum winning possible number M1.

  After setting the maximum winable number M1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-3, and it is determined whether the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". If the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S205-16-4-3: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-4 and "open command" AC is set. That is, when the production mode is the "normal production mode" or the "latency production mode", the same "opening command" set when the "2R probability variation big hit" occurs is set as the "opening command". Be done. Therefore, in the “normal production mode” and the “latency production mode”, the current lottery mode is maintained as it is, “2R probability variation jackpot” in which the lottery mode is set to the “high probability mode” based on the opening presentation. It can not be distinguished from "small hit".

  Subsequent to step S205-16-4-4, in step S205-16-4-5, the "opening waiting timer" corresponding to the duration time of the opening effect when "AC" is set as the "opening command" is It is set.

  Thereafter, in step S205-16-4-6, the process of setting the "wait for release flag" is performed, and in step S205-16-4-7, the process of setting the "small hitting middle flag" is performed, and the process is ended. In the small hitting setting process, the "return flag" is not turned off as in the big hitting setting process. That is, the occurrence of the small hit does not cancel the execution of the "return effect" (return process).

  On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S205-16-4-3, it shifts to Step S205-16-4-8, and "AD" is set up as an "opening command." That is, when the effect mode is the "time reduction effect mode" or the "probability change effect mode", the "opening command" is set to the same "opening command" set when the "2R time short hit" occurs. Ru. Therefore, in the "probable variation production mode", the lottery mode is changed from the "high probability mode" to the "low probability mode" based on the opening effect (falling) "2R hour junior high hit", the lottery mode is "high" It can not be distinguished from the "small hit" which is maintained as "probability mode".

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the “opening command” set when the “2R normal jackpot” occurs and the “opening command” set when the “small hit” occurs Are configured to be the same. Therefore, based on the opening effect, it becomes impossible to distinguish "2R normal jackpot" in which the lottery mode is changed to "low probability mode" and "small hit" in which the current lottery mode is maintained as it is. There is.

  After step S205-16-4-8, in step S205-16-4-9, the "opening waiting timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AD" is set as the "opening command" is set. Be done.

  Thereafter, in step S205-16-4-6, the process of setting the "wait for release flag" is performed, and in step S205-16-4-7, the process of setting the "small hitting middle flag" is performed, and the process is ended.

  Returning to the variation end setting process shown in FIG. 21, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-3, the process proceeds to step S205-16-5, and the counter value of the “support frequency counter” is “0” It is determined whether or not.

  In step S205-16-5, when the counter value of the "number of times of support" is "0", the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the "support frequency counter" is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is considered that the "high support mode" is being set, and in step S205-16-6 A process of subtracting 1 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S205-16-7.

  In step S205-16-7, it is determined whether the "return flag" is set. Then, if the "return flag" is set (S205-16-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-8 to perform return processing.

  The “return flag” is information used to determine whether or not to perform return processing, and is set when “small hit” occurs in the “probable change effect mode” in the small hit end setting process described later. (Step S206-14-5-3).

  Next, the return process of step S205-16-8 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the return process, first, in step S205-16-8-1, the value of the "counter for return" which can be set in the small hitting end setting process (steps S206-14-5, S206-14-5-4) described later. Subtract one. Next, in step S205-16-8-2, it is determined whether the value of the "return counter" is "0". Here, if the value of the “return counter” is not “0” (S205-16-8-2: NO), the return process is ended. The “return counter” is a numerical value that defines the timing of occurrence of the return processing to the “probability change effect mode” described above.

  On the other hand, when the value of the "counter for return" is "0" (S205-16-8-2: YES), it is the timing to perform the return process to the "probable change effect mode" described above, so In step S205-16-8-3, "return effect command" is set. Note that the “return effect command” indicates that the effect mode shifts to the “probability effect mode” (in the present embodiment, the break stage) after the change stop, and clearly indicates that the “high probability mode” is set. The command is output to the sub control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the effect. As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the sub control device 262 to which the “return effect command” is input controls the display control device 45 so that “return effect” is displayed on the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. In the present embodiment, for example, a predetermined character is displayed, and effects such as characters indicating transition to the “probable change effect mode” (in the present embodiment, “break mode re-entry”) are displayed. Let

  Referring back to FIG. 24, following the setting of the “return effect command”, the “game state determination value Xj” is set to “4” in step S205-16-8-4. Thereby, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the time of the next change is set to the "probability change effect mode". Subsequently, the "return flag" is turned off in step S205-16-8-5. Thereafter, in S205-16-8-6, setting processing of "playing state notification command" is performed, and the return processing is ended.

  The “playing state notification command” is a command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the effect mode that is newly set after the end of the big hit. The “playing state notification command” includes “playing state determination value Xj” related to the new effect mode.

  Now, returning to the explanation of the variation end setting process of FIG. 21, if the "return flag" is not set (S205-16-7: NO), or after the end of the return process (S205-16-8), Then, the process proceeds to step S205-16-9, and it is determined whether the counter value of the "number of times of support counter" is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display has been a predetermined number of variable display after the end of the big hit (after the provision of the high support mode). Here, if the value of the “number of times of support” is “0”, processing of switching the value of the “support mode flag” to “A0” indicating the “low support mode” is performed in step S205-16-10.

  The “support mode flag” is state determination information for determining what kind of state the winning support mode is in. In the present embodiment, as the flag value of “support mode flag”, “A0” is set when the winning support mode is “low support mode”, and the winning support mode is “high support mode”. "A1" is set. The value “A” of the upper 4 bits in the “support mode flag” is uniformly added for noise reduction, and is not for determining the gaming state.

  Further, along with the switching process of the "support mode flag" in step S205-16-10, "game state determination value Xj" is set to "1" in step S205-16-11. Thus, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the next change is set to the "normal effect mode". When the main control unit 261 selects a stage in the “normal effect mode”, in step S205-16-11, a plurality of “playing state determination values Xj” corresponding to the respective stages in the “normal effect mode” are selected. One of them is randomly selected.

  Further, in the subsequent step S205-16-12, a "gaming state notification command" (including the "gaming state determination value Xj set to" 1 ") is set, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S205-16-9 that the counter value of the "support frequency counter" is not "0", this processing ends. Note that the jackpot setting process (step S205-16-2) or the small hitting setting process (step S205-16-4) is performed in the variation end setting process, and the "big hit flag" or the "small hit flag" is set. In the case where it is determined, the "lottery mode flag" may be reset once ("50" may be set), and the "high probability mode" may be interrupted during the middle or middle jackpot.

  Now, returning to FIG. 10, in the normal processing, the variable winning device control processing of step S206 is executed following step S205. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set to determine what kind of control the variable winning device 32 should perform. Thereby, when it becomes a big hit state or a small hit state, the opening and closing process of the opening and closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times.

  Next, the variable winning device control process of step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S206-1, it is determined whether the "release wait flag" is on. Here, if the "release wait flag" is on (S206-1: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-2, and the "release wait timer" is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-3, and it is determined whether or not the "opening wait timer" is zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the fluctuation stop is equal to or more than the standby time until the opening / closing operation (special prize state) is started in the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32. Here, if the "opening waiting timer" is 0 (S206-3: YES), it is the start timing of the opening / closing operation (special award state) on the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32, so the process proceeds to step S206-4. Shift and turn off the "wait for release flag". On the other hand, when the "opening waiting timer" is not 0 (S206-3: NO), the processing has not been reached because the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 has not been reached yet.

  After the "opening waiting flag" is turned off in step S206-4, "0" is set as an initial value in the "opening number counter" in step S206-5. Note that the "opening number counter" is a state determination for determining the cumulative number of occurrences of the special prize state executed during the big hit state or the small hit state, that is, the cumulative execution number of the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b during the hit state. It is information.

  After step S206-5, or when a negative determination is made in step S206-1, the process proceeds to step S206-6, and it is determined whether or not the "big hit flag" is on. Here, when the “big hit flag” is on (S 206-6: YES), that is, a big hit occurs, and the standby of the opening / closing process in the opening / closing plate 32 b of the variable winning device 32 is canceled (opening effect Is completed, the processing of steps S206-7 to S206-9 is performed, and the number obtained by adding 1 to the initial value of the "remaining open number counter" set in the above-described jackpot setting process is added to the opening / closing plate 32b. Open and close.

  Specifically, first, in step S206-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the "opening number counter" is zero. Here, when the value of the "opening number counter" is 0 (S206-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8, and a jackpot special prize state start process is performed. That is, the setting process according to the opening of the first round in the opening and closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is performed. The jackpot special prize state start process is performed for each round, and in this process, the "first variable flag", the "first variable timer", and the "winning counter" which are necessary for the opening and closing process of the opening and closing plate 32b While the setting process of Vx is performed, the "xx round open command" described later is set. Further, among the big hit special prize state start processing, only the processing related to the first round is branched to the case (S206-7: YES) in which the value of the "number-of-openings counter" is 0 (step S206-8) However, the jackpot special prize state start process according to the other rounds is performed in the jackpot variable winning prize apparatus control process (step S206-9) described later.

  Here, the jackpot special prize state start process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S206-8-1, the "first variable flag" is turned on. The “first variable flag” is state determination information for determining whether the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the “first variable flag” is turned on (“1” is set as the flag value), and the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 32 is When 32 b is in the closed state, the “first variable flag” is turned off (“0” is set as the flag value).

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-8-2, where "winning counter Vx" is set to 0 as an initial value. The “winning counter Vx” is a winning counting means for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the variable winning device 32. In this embodiment, at the time of switch reading processing S301 (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and the winning on the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that there has been, the value of the "winning counter Vx" is incremented by one. The "winning counter Vx" is reset every round (in the case of an initial value of 0) in the case of a big hit, but in the case of a small hit, an initial value is set in the first opening. After that, reset is not performed in the subsequent opening. That is, in the case of the small winning, the total number of winnings of the game balls to the variable winning device 32 in the small hitting state is measured in the "winning counter Vx".

  Following step S206-8-2, in step S206-8-3, "1" is added to the "opening number counter". For example, in the first big hit special prize start process at the big hit time, 1 is added to the initial value (0) of the “open count counter”, and the “open count counter” is updated to 1.

  After step S206-8-3, the process proceeds to step S206-8-4 to perform setting processing of the "first variable timer". The "first variable timer" is a measuring means for measuring the open time of the variable winning device 32 (time of occurrence of the special prize state), the interval between the special prize states, etc. It is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the end of opening. In step S206-8-4, in consideration of the opening / closing pattern control table (see FIG. 51), the maximum opening time per opening / closing operation corresponding to various types of contacts is set in the “first variable timer”. For example, when the open mode of the opening and closing plate 32b is "long open" as in "16R probability variation big hit", "7500" is set to "first variable timer" and "2R probability variation big hit" or "2R When the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing plate 32b is the above-mentioned "short open" as in the case of "normal large hit", "100" is set to the "first variable timer". As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b is set to "30 seconds" in the case of "long opening" and "0.4 seconds in the case of" short opening " Will be set.

  After setting the “first variable timer”, the process proceeds to step S206-8-5, and it is determined whether the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” or the “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is on. Here, when “16R probability variation big hit flag” or “8R probability variation big hit flag” is on (S206-8-5: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-6 and the round open stored in the ROM 502 A setting process of “xx round open command” is performed based on the command table (see FIG. 53) (Note that the current number of rounds, that is, the value of the “open number counter” is substituted for “xx”). After setting the "xx round open command", the process ends.

  The "xx round open command" is transmitted to the sub control device 262 in order to execute the effect during opening which is performed during the opening of the variable winning device 32 in the hit state on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is a command. In addition, “xx round opening command” is set according to the opening number of the variable winning device 32, for example, “1 round opening command” is set in the 1st opening, and “2 round opening”. The 2 round open command is set.

  Furthermore, the "xx round open command" in the present embodiment has a 2-byte configuration, the upper byte is configured by the information corresponding to the effect being released, and the lower byte is the value of the "open counter", that is, in the middle of a big hit It is comprised by the information (In this embodiment, the value of "the frequency | count counter of opening") which shows how many opening operation | movement.

  Note that the relationship between the “xx round open command” and the effect being released is stored in a table in the sub-control device 262, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the “xx round open command”, the display control device 45 Is controlled to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute an open effect corresponding to the received "xx round open command".

  In the setting process of "xx round open command" in step S206-8-6, since "16R probability variation big hit flag" or "8R probability change big hit flag" is on, as shown in FIG. 53, "xx round release command" “BAxx” is set as The sub-control device 262 that has received "BAxx" as the "xx round open command" controls the display control device 45 to cause the display part 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform an open effect. In addition, in the effect during opening at this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, while displaying information such as a numerical value indicating how many open eyes (what round number) on the display unit 42a, a predetermined character etc. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, “xx round open command” corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot” and “xx round opening command” corresponding to “8R probability variation jackpot” are common commands, and when both jackpots are A similar effect during opening will be performed from the first round to the eighth round. Since a common open effect is performed using a common command, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to create effects and reduce the data capacity and processing load.

  Now, if a negative determination is made in step S206-8-5, the process proceeds to step S206-8-7, and it is determined whether the "2R probability variation big hit flag" is on. If the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S206-8-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-8, and the "lottery mode flag" is considered, and the "high probability mode" is set. It is determined whether or not. And when a negative judging is carried out at Step S206-8-8 (when it is "low probability mode"), it shifts to Step S206-8-9, and "playing state judgment value Xj" is "2". In other words, it is determined whether the current rendering mode is the "time-saving rendering mode". If a negative determination is made in step S206-8-9, that is, if the "latency effect mode" of the "normal effect mode" or the "low probability mode" is selected, the process proceeds to step S206-8-10. Set “BBxx” as “xx round open command” referring to the round open command table. After setting the "xx round open command", the process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-8-8 or step S206-8-9, the process proceeds to step S206-8-11, and the round open command table is referred to, and “xx round Set "BDxx" as the release command. After setting the "xx round open command", the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206-8-7, the process proceeds to step S206-8-12, in which it is determined whether the "2R hour junior high hit flag" is on. Then, if the “2R hour minor jackpot flag” is on (S206-8-12: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-13, and the “xx round open command” is referred to the round open command table. Set "BCxx" as. After setting the "xx round open command", the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-8-12, that is, if it is considered that "2R normal big hit" has occurred, the process proceeds to step S206-8-14 and "gaming state determination value Xj". It is determined whether or not "1" is "3". If the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S206-8-14: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-10, and the round open command table is referred to, " "BBxx" is set as the xx round open command ", and this processing ends. That is, when "2R normal jackpot" occurs when the rendering mode is "normal rendering mode" or "latency rendering mode", the previous stage of ending rendering showing transition to "latency rendering mode" Perform the production in

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-8-14, the process proceeds to step S206-8-13, sets "BCxx" as the "xx round open command", and the present process is ended. . That is, when "2R normal jackpot" occurs when the production mode is "time reduction production mode" or "probable variation production mode", the same open presentation as when "2R hour junior high hit" occurs It will be.

  Returning to the variable winning device control processing of FIG. 25, if the negative determination is made in step S206-7, or after the jackpot special prize state start processing in step S206-8, the processing proceeds to step S206-9 and the jackpot time variable Perform winning device control processing. Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the jackpot time variable winning device control process will be described.

  First, in step S206-9-1, the count value of the "first variable timer" is decremented by one.

  In the following step S206-9-2, it is determined whether the "first variable flag" is on. If a positive determination is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the processing in steps S206-9-3 to S206-9-7 is performed.

  More specifically, first, in step S206-9-3, whether or not the count value of the "first variable timer" is "0", that is, one opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b ("long opening" or "short opening It is determined whether or not there is an open time (specified time "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds") per).

  If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-3, the process proceeds to step S206-9-4, and it is determined whether the value of "winning counter Vx" is equal to or greater than a prescribed number K1, that is, in one special prize state. It is determined whether or not the number of gaming balls having won the variable winning device 32 has reached the maximum number of scheduled winnings (the prescribed number “10” or “3”). If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-4, that is, if the timing for setting the variable winning device 32 in the closed state (timing for ending the special prize state) has not yet come, the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-3 or step S206-9-4, that is, when it is a timing to set the variable winning device 32 (which is currently in the open state) to be closed, the step The process proceeds to S206-9-5, and it is determined whether the counter value of the "remaining open number counter" is "0", that is, the number of execution times of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has reached a specified number. It is determined whether or not.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-5, release end setting processing is performed in step S206-9-6, and the present processing is ended. In the release end setting process of step S206-9-6, the "first variable flag" is turned off and the "big hit end flag" is turned on. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is put in the closed state, and the processing when ending the big hit state can be executed. The “big hit end flag” is state determination information used when determining the end of the big hit state in step S206-9-9.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-5, that is, if the number of times the special prize state ("long release" or "short release") has not been executed has reached a specified number, then a large hit is made in step S206-9-7. The special prize sending process is performed, and the process is ended. Next, the jackpot special prize delivery process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-9-7-1, the "first variable flag" is turned off. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed. In addition, if the "first variable flag" is turned off, if it is a big hit state (S206-6: YES), a negative determination is made in step S206-9-2. That is, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state (the "first variable flag" is on), the processing in steps S206-9-3 to S206-9-7 is performed, and the variable winning device 32 is If it is in the closed state (the "first variable flag" is off), the processing in S206-9-8 to S206-9-11 is performed.

  After step S206-9-7-1, in step S206-9-7-2, the value of the "remaining open number counter" is decremented by one. Subsequently, in step S206-9-7-3, setting processing of the "first variable timer" is performed. In step S206-9-7-3, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the end of the jackpot), is set in the "first variable timer". In order to determine whether or not the interval from the end of the next to the start of the special prize state has elapsed, etc.), the above-mentioned opening / closing pattern control table is referred to and a predetermined value (for example, "3 seconds") 750 "or" 250 "corresponding to" one second "is set.

  Following step S206-9-7-3, in step S206-9-7-4, it is determined whether the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-7-4, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-5, and based on the round closing command table (see FIG. 54) stored in the ROM 502, “xx round The setting process of the closing command is performed (in addition, the current number of rounds, that is, the value of the "opening number counter" is substituted into "xx"). After the setting of “xx round closing command”, this process ends.

  The "xx round closing command" is transmitted to the sub control device 262 in order to execute a closing effect performed during closing of the variable winning device 32 in the hit state on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is a command. In addition, “xx round closing command” is set according to the closing number of times of the variable winning device 32, for example, “1 round closing command” is set at the first closing time (at the end of the first round) In the second closing, "two round closing command" is set.

  Furthermore, the “xx round closing command” in the present embodiment has a 2-byte configuration, the upper byte is configured by the information corresponding to the effect during closing, and the lower byte is the value of the “opening number counter”, that is, in the big hit It is configured by information (in the present embodiment, the value of the “opening number counter”) indicating how many times the closing operation is performed.

  The sub controller 262 stores the relationship between the “xx round closing command” and the effect during closing in the form of a table, and when the sub controller 262 receives the “xx round closing command”, the display controller 45 Is controlled to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute a closing effect corresponding to the received "xx round open command".

  In the setting process of “xx round closing command” in step S206-9-7-5, “CA xx” is selected as “xx round closing command” because “16R probability variation big hit flag” or “8R probability variation big hit flag” is on. It is set. After the setting of “xx round closing command”, this process ends.

  In addition, the sub-control device 262 that has received "CAxx" as the "xx round closing command" controls the display control device 45, whereby the display part 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the effect during opening immediately before ("xx" An on-closing presentation (for example, see FIG. 69) is performed following the on-opening presentation performed when "BAxx" is set as the round opening command. That is, in the case of "16R probability variation big hit" or "8R probability variation big hit", the effect corresponding to one special prize state is performed by alternately performing the opening effect and the closing effect in the decorative symbol display device 42. It is made, and the jackpot production in the jackpot state is performed by the said presentation being performed in each round. In the present embodiment, when the player wins the “16R probability variation jackpot” or the “8R probability variation jackpot,” different in-opening effects are performed in the respective special prize states (each round) of the variable winning device 32. There is.

  On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S206-9-7-4, it shifts to Step S206-9-7-6, and it is judged whether "2R probability variation big hit flag" is ON. If the “2R probability variation jackpot flag” is on (S206-9-7-6: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-7, and the “high probability” is determined in consideration of the “lottery mode flag”. It is determined whether the mode is "mode". And when a negative judging is carried out at Step S206-9-7-7 (when it is "low probability mode"), it shifts to Step S206-9-7-8, and "playing state judgment value Xj" It is determined whether it is "2", that is, whether the current rendering mode is the "time-saving rendering mode". If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-8, that is, if it is the "latency effect mode" of the "normal effect mode" or the "low probability mode", the step S206-9-7-9. Switch to the round closing command table and set “CBxx” as “xx round closing command”. After the setting of “xx round closing command”, this process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-7-7 or step S206-9-7-8, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-10, and the round closing command table is referred to. Then, set "CDxx" as "xx round closing command". After setting the "xx round open command", the process ends.

  In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-6, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-11, and it is determined whether or not the "2R hour minors hit flag" is on. Then, if the "2R hour minor jackpot flag" is on (S206-9-7-11: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-12, and the round closing command table is referred to, and "xx" is received. Set "CCxx" as the round closing command. After setting the "xx round open command", the process ends.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-11, that is, when it is considered that "2R normal jackpot" has occurred, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-13, and "playing state" It is determined whether the determination value Xj is "1" or "3". If the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S206-9-7-13: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-9. Then, referring to the round closing command table, “CBxx” is set as the “xx round closing command”, and this process ends. That is, when "2R normal jackpot" occurs when the rendering mode is "normal rendering mode" or "latency rendering mode", the previous stage of ending rendering showing transition to "latency rendering mode" Perform the production in

  On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S206-9-7-13, it shifts to Step S206-7-9-12. Then, referring to the round closing command table, “CCxx” is set as the “xx round closing command”, and the process ends. That is, when "2R normal jackpot" occurs when the production mode is "time reduction production mode" or "probable variation production mode", the same closed presentation as when "2R hour junior high hit" occurs is performed. It will be.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it becomes "2R probability variation big hit", "2R time shorts big hit" or "2R normal big hit", the effect during opening and the effect during closing are alternately alternately performed twice in the decorative symbol display device 42. By performing each, it is configured such that a series of jackpot effects (indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish between open effect and closed effect) are performed.

  For example, the sub-control device 262 that receives “BBxx” as “xx round open command” and “CBxx” as “xx round close command” controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol display device 42. In the display unit 42a of the, the "latency correspondence jackpot effect" is performed. The “latency correspondence big hit middle effect” is performed following the “latency opening response effect” (see FIG. 73), and the effect mode from the time of the next change is set to the “latency effect mode”. If it is executed. In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed as the “latent correspondence jackpot effect”.

  Also, for example, the sub-control device 262 that has received “BCxx” as “xx round open command” and received “CCxx” as “xx round close command” controls the display control device 45 to display a decorative symbol. In the display unit 42a of the device 42, "time-shortening corresponding jackpot effect" is performed. The "time-short response big hit medium effect" is performed following the "time-short response opening effect" (see FIG. 78), and is executed when the effect mode from the time of the next change is set to the "time short effect mode" Be done. In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 79, an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed as the “time-saving correspondence big hit middle effect”.

  Furthermore, for example, the sub-control device 262 that receives “BDxx” as “xx round open command” and “CDxx” as “xx round close command” controls the display control device 45 to display a decorative symbol. In the display unit 42a of the device 42, "promotion corresponding jackpot effect" is performed. The "promotion corresponding opening presentation" is performed following the "latent opening presentation" (see FIG. 73), and is performed when the presentation mode from the time of the next change is set to the "probable change presentation mode" Be done. In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 77, an effect of displaying a character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed as the “promotion corresponding big hit middle effect”.

  In addition, case division processing (step S206-9-7-4, step S206-9-7-6 to S206-9-7-8, step S206-9-7) in the previous step of setting "xx round closing command". -11 and step S 206-9-7-13) are divided into cases (step S 206-8-5, steps S 206-8-7 to S 206-8-9) in the pre-step of setting “xx round open command”. This process is the same as step S206-8-12 and step S206-8-14). Therefore, the above case division processing in the previous step of setting the "xx round open command" or the "xx round close command" is made into a subroutine, and the processing made into this subroutine is a jackpot special prize state start process (step S206-8) and a jackpot. The time special prize sending process (step S206-9-7) may be used in common. In this case, the data capacity can be reduced.

  Also, the type of "xx round closing command" to be set corresponds to the type of "xx round opening command" (for example, when "BAxx" is set as "xx round opening command", "xx" is set. When “CAxx” is always set as the round closing command and “BBxx” is set as the “xx round open command”, “CBxx” is always set as the “xx round closing command”. That is, in the present embodiment, in the “xx round open command” and the “xx round close command” to be set, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured to be common information (for example, “xx round open When "BAxx" is set as the command and "CAxx" is set as the xx round closing command, the lower 4 bits "A" of the upper byte are common. Therefore, in the first jackpot special prize state start process at the jackpot, the common information is acquired by performing the above case division processing, and in setting of the "xx round open command" and the "xx round close command" thereafter. Alternatively, the acquired common information may be used without performing the case division process. In this case, the processing load can be reduced.

  Referring back to FIG. 27, when the determination in step S206-9-2 is negative, the process proceeds to step S206-9-8, and it is determined whether the value of the "first variable timer" is "0". If the negative determination is made in step S206-9-2, that is, if the "first variable flag" is off, the value of the "first variable timer" is the remaining time of the interval time. There is. Therefore, the process of step S206-9-8 is a process of determining whether or not it is within a predetermined time after the end of the prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of the winning or during an interval between the prize states).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-8, that is, a predetermined time elapses from the end of the special prize state, and it is time to shift to the next process (start of next special prize state or start of ending effect) If it does, the process proceeds to step S206-9-9. On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S206-9-8, this processing is ended as it is.

  In step S206-9-9, in consideration of the "big hit end flag", it is determined whether or not to end the big hit state. If the negative judgment is made in step S206-9-9, that is, if it is not the end time of the jackpot state, the jackpot special prize state start process is performed in step S206-9-10, and then this process is ended. The jackpot special prize state start process in step S206-9-10 is the same as the process in step S206-8.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-9, after the jackpot end setting process is performed in step S206-9-11, the present process is ended.

  In the jackpot end setting process of step S206-9-11, the "jackpot flag" and the "jackpot end flag" are turned off, the switching process of the "lottery mode flag", the switching process of the "support mode flag", the "supporting frequency" A setting process of the counter, a setting process of the "playing state notification command", a setting process of the "ending command", and the like are performed.

  In addition, the "ending command" is a sub for the "ending effect" to be performed immediately before the normal game started after the "big hit state" or the "small hit state" on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is output to the controller 262. The “ending effect” is performed to notify, for example, the type of effect mode set after the end of the jackpot or the small jack, the switching of the lottery mode, the end of the jackpot or the small jack, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the "ending effect" includes "a probability variation-based ending effect", a "latent response ending effect", and a "time-shorting corresponding ending effect".

  As shown in FIG. 70, the “probability change ending effect” is an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery mode from the next change will be the “high probability mode” (in the present embodiment, for example, “break mode rush”) It is an effect that characters such as are displayed, and by this effect, it is possible for the player to grasp that the “probability change effect mode” to which the “high probability mode” is given from the time of the next change)) as the “ending command” "EA" is set.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the “latency corresponding ending effect” indicates that the player is to be in the “latency effect mode” in the effect mode from the time of the next change (in the present embodiment, for example, “sales” It is an effect that characters such as "mode entry" are displayed. Note that in the “latency-ready ending effect”, it is not possible to determine whether the lottery mode from the next change is the “high probability mode” or the “low probability mode”. Further, when executing the “probable ending corresponding rendering effect”, “EB” is set as the “ending command”.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the “time reduction response ending effect” allows the player to grasp that the effect mode from the time of the next change becomes the “time reduction effect mode”, but the lottery mode is the “high probability mode”. It is an effect that can not be determined whether it is the "low probability mode" (in the present embodiment, for example, an effect that characters such as "training mode entry" are displayed), and "EC" is set as the "ending command" Be done.

  Here, the jackpot end setting process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. First, in step S206-9-11-1, the "big hit flag" is turned off. Furthermore, in step S206-9-11-2, the "big hit end flag" is turned off.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-3, and it is determined whether the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is set.

  If the "8R probability variation big hit flag" or the "16R probability variation big hit flag" is set (S206-9-11-3: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-4, and the "lottery mode flag" “53” indicating “high probability mode” is set as the flag value of. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-5, and a value that can not be reached practically (for example, "99999" corresponding to 99999 fluctuation displays) is set to the value of the "support frequency counter".

  Further, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-6, and the flag value of the "support mode flag" is set to "A1" indicating that the "high support mode" is set.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-7, and "ending command" is set based on the ending command table (see FIG. 55). Here, since the “8R probability variation jackpot flag” or the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is on, “EA” is set as the “ending command”.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-8, where "gaming state determination value Xj" is set to "4". That is, when "8R probability variation big hit" or "16R probability variation big hit" occurs, the production mode after the big hit is set to the "probability variation production mode" regardless of the production mode at the current time. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and a "gaming state notification command" including the "gaming state determination value Xj" set to "4" is set.

  In addition, when neither “8R probability variation jackpot flag” nor “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is on (S206-9-11-3: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-10, “2R It is determined whether or not the "predictive jackpot flag" is on. If the "2R probability variation big hit flag" is on (S206-9-11-10: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-11, and the "high probability mode" is determined with reference to the "lottery mode flag". It is determined whether the If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-11-11, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-4, and the same processing as in the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-11-3 ( S206-9-11-4 to S206-9-11-8) are performed.

  On the other hand, if it is not the "high probability mode" (S206-9-11-11: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-12, and is "gaming state determination value Xj" being "2"? It is determined whether or not. If "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" (S206-9-11-12: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-4 and affirmation is made in step S206-9-11-3. The same processing (S206-9-11 to S206-9-11-8) as in the case where the determination is made is performed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when “8R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot” occurs, “2R probability variation jackpot” occurs in “high probability mode”, and “time probability of“ low probability mode ” When "2R probability variation big hit" occurs during the production mode, "high probability mode" and "up to next time-high support mode" are given, and "probability change production" that the production mode from the time of next change clearly shows it Mode.

  If negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-12, that is, if the effect mode is "normal effect mode", or if the effect mode is "latency effect mode" in "low probability mode" If there is any, the process proceeds to S206-9-11-13, and "53" indicating "high probability mode" is set as the flag value of the "lottery mode flag".

  Then, it transfers to step S206-9-11-14, and "0" is set to the value of "the frequency | count counter of support". Further, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-15, and the flag value of the "support mode flag" is set to "A0" indicating that the "low support mode" is set.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-16, and "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, “EB” is set as the “ending command” since the “dual probability effect mode” of the “normal effect mode” or the “low probability mode” and the “2R probability variation big hit flag” is on. .

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-17, and "gaming state determination value Xj" is set to "3". That is, the effect mode after the big hit is set to the “latency effect mode”. Then, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and a "gaming state notification command" including the "gaming state determination value Xj" set to "3" is set.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-10, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-18, and it is determined whether or not the "2R hour minors hit flag" is on. Here, when the “2R hour minors hit flag” is on (S206-9-11-18: YES), the process proceeds to S206-9-11-19, and “low” as the flag value of the “lottery mode flag”. “50” is set to indicate that the mode is “probability mode”. Furthermore, it transfers to step S206-9-11-20, and "100" is set to the value of "the frequency | count counter of support".

  Then, it transfers to step S206-9-11-21, and the flag value of a "support mode flag" is set to "A1" which shows that it is "high support mode."

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-22, and "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since the “2R hour short jackpot flag” is on, “EC” is set as the “ending command”.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-23, and the "gaming state determination value Xj" is set to "2". That is, the effect mode after the big hit is set to the "time-saving effect mode". Then, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and a "gaming state notification command" including the "gaming state determination value Xj" set to "2" is set.

  Furthermore, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-18, that is, when the "2R normal jackpot flag" is turned on, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-24, and the "game state" is made. It is determined whether the determination value Xj is "1" or "3". If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-24, that is, "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", and the effect mode is "time reduction effect mode" or "probability change effect mode" If yes, the processing of step S206-9-11-19 to step S206-9-11-23 is performed, and the "playing state notification command" is set in step S206-9-11-9. . That is, when “2R normal jackpot” occurs in “time reduction effect mode” or “probability change effect mode”, the support frequency, lottery mode, and the like are set as in the case where “2R hour / time short jackpot” occurs.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-11-24, that is, when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latency effect effect mode", step S206-9-11-25. , And “50” indicating “low probability mode” is set as the flag value of “lottery mode flag”. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-14, and the processes of steps S206-9-11-14 to S206-9-11-17 are performed, and at step S206-9-11-9, "the gaming state is set. Notification command is set. That is, when "2R normal jackpot" occurs in "normal production mode" or "latency production mode", the support frequency and support mode, the production mode is the same as the support frequency at the time of winning "2R probability variation jackpot", etc. However, unlike the lottery mode at the time of winning the “2R probability variation jackpot”, the lottery mode is the “low probability mode”.

  After setting the "gaming state notification command" in step S206-9-11-9, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-26, and "big hit flag" and various "big hit flags" ("16R probability variation big hit flag", etc. ) Is turned off, and the process ends.

  In addition, the switch setting process (S206-9-11-4, S206-9-11-13, S206-9-11-19, S206-9-11-25) of the "lottery mode flag" in the main control device 261. The function to perform comprises the mode switching means and mode determination means in this embodiment.

  In the above, the control processing in the case where a positive determination is made in step S206-6 (see FIG. 25), that is, the case where a jackpot such as "16R probability variation jackpot" has occurred in the variable winning control processing has been described. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, when a negative determination is made in step S206-6, the process proceeds to step S206-10, and it is determined whether the "small hitting middle flag" is on. Then, if a negative determination is made in step S206-10, that is, if both the "big hit flag" and the "small hit flag" are off, the present process (variable winning device control process) is ended. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-10, that is, when a small hit occurs, the processes after step S206-11 are performed. Therefore, next, control processing when a small hit occurs in the variable winning control process will be described.

  First, in step S206-11, it is determined whether or not the value of the "opening number counter" is zero. Here, if the value of the "opening number counter" is 0 (S206-11: YES), that is, if the variable winning device 32 has never been opened since the occurrence of the small hit, the step It transfers to S206-12. Then, in step S206-12, "0" is set as the initial value for "winning counter Vx". As described above, at the time of the big hit, "winning counter Vx" is reset every one opening and closing operation in the variable winning device 32 (S206-8-2), but when the small hit, the opening and closing operation of the variable winning device 32 Before the process, the initial value is set to the "winning counter Vx" only once, and the "winning counter VX" is not reset in the subsequent opening / closing operation. That is, at the time of the big hit, the number of winnings of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 in one opening / closing operation (special prize state) is measured by the "winning counter Vx". The total number of winning game balls for 32 is to be measured.

  Next, following the setting process of the "winning counter Vx" in step S206-12, a small winning special prize state start process is performed in step S206-13. The small hit special prize state start process corresponds to the above-mentioned large hit special prize state start process when a small hit occurs. In the small hit special prize state start process, the process of setting the “first variable flag” and the “first variable timer” required for the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 32 is performed, and the “xx open command” described later Settings are made. Here, the small hit special prize state start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-13-1, the "first variable flag" is turned on. Next, the process proceeds to step S206-13-2 and 1 is added to the "opening number counter". For example, in the first small hit special prize state start process at the small hit time, 1 is added to the initial value (0) of the "open number counter", and the "open number counter" is updated to one.

  After step S206-13-2, the process proceeds to step S206-13-3, and a setting process of the "first variable timer" is performed with reference to the open / close pattern control table (see FIG. 51). In step S206-13-3, the maximum open time per opening / closing operation corresponding to the small hit is set in the "first variable timer". In the present embodiment, "100" is set to the "first variable timer", and the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is set to "0.4 seconds" Ru.

  After setting the "first variable timer", the process proceeds to step S206-13-4, and it is determined whether the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". Here, if the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S206-13-4: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-13-5, and the open eye stored in the ROM 502 The setting process of "xx open command" is performed based on the command table [refer to FIG. 56 (a)] (In addition, in "xx", the number of times the variable winning device 32 has been opened since a small hit occurred, that is, , The value of the "opening number counter" is substituted). After setting the "xx open command", the process ends.

  The “xx open command” corresponds to the “xx round open command” set at the big hit, and is set only at the small hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the “xx open command” has the same configuration as the “xx round open command”. That is, the "xx open command" has a 2-byte configuration, the upper byte is configured by the information corresponding to the effect being released, and the lower byte is the value of the "open counter", that is, the number of times in the small hit It is comprised by the information (In this embodiment, the value of "the frequency | count counter of opening") which shows whether it is opening operation. Further, since the “xx open command” has the same configuration as the “xx round open command”, the control process when the “xx open command” is received in the sub control device 262, and “xx round” There is no difference from the control process when the release command is received, and the same process is performed. Furthermore, the "xx open command" is set according to the open count of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32, for example, the "first open command" is set at the first open, and the "open at the second open". "2 open command" is set.

  Note that the relationship between “xx open command” and effect being released is stored in a table in the sub controller 262, and when the sub controller 262 receives the “xx open command”, the display controller 45 By controlling the, the effect corresponding to the received "xx open command" is executed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the setting process of the “xx open command” in step S206-13-5, “BBxx” is set as the “xx open command” because “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”. Ru. After setting the "xx open command", the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S206-13-4, that is, if the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", the process proceeds to step S206-13-6. "BCxx" is set as the "xx open command". After setting the "xx open command", the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 25, if the negative determination is made in step S206-11, or after the small winning special prize state start process in step S206-13, the process proceeds to step S206-14 and the small winning time variable winning apparatus control process I do. Next, the small hitting time variable winning device control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-14-1, the count value of the "first variable timer" is decremented by one.

  In the following step S206-14-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the "winning counter Vx" is equal to or more than the maximum number of possible winnings M1, that is, the total number of gaming balls awarded to the variable winning device 32 in the small hitting state is the largest possible number of winnings. It is determined whether M1 ("10" in this embodiment) has been reached. When an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-2, the "first variable flag" is turned off in step S206-14-3, and the "small hit end flag" in step S206-14-4. Is turned on, and a small hitting end setting process described later of step S206-14-5 is performed, and the present process is ended. That is, at the time of big hit, after the opening and closing operation is always performed a preset number of times in the variable winning device 32, the big hit state ends, but at the time of small hitting, the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 32 is maximum Even when the opening time of the variable winning device 32 remains or the remaining opening number of the variable winning device 32 is not 0 ("the remaining opening number counter is 0") when the number M1 of possible winnings has been reached, The small hit state is configured to end.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-2, that is, if the value of the "winning counter Vx" has not reached the maximum number M1, the process proceeds to step S206-14-6. It is determined whether "1 variable flag" is on. If a positive determination is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the processing in steps S206-14 to S206-14-10 is performed.

  More specifically, first, in step S206-14-7, whether or not the count value of the "first variable timer" is "0", that is, the open time per one opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b (in this embodiment) It is determined whether "0.4 seconds" is left. If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-7, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 has not yet come, the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-7, that is, when it is a time to set the variable winning device 32 (which is currently open) to a closed state, the process proceeds to step S206-14-8. It is determined whether the counter value of the "remaining release number counter" is "0", that is, whether the number of times of execution of the special prize state has reached a prescribed maximum number (two times).

  If the determination in step S206-14-8 is affirmative, the release end setting process is performed in step S206-14-9, and the process ends. In the release end setting process of step S206-14-9, the "first variable flag" is turned off and the "small hit end flag" is turned on. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed, and processing (S206-14-5) for terminating the small hitting state can be performed. The “small hitting end flag” is state determination information used when determining the end of the small hitting state in step S206-14-12.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-8, that is, if the number of times the special prize state has not been executed has reached the prescribed maximum number, small win special prize feed processing is performed in step S206-14-10, and the main prize is processed. End the process. Next, the small hit special prize sending process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-14-10-1, the "first variable flag" is turned off. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed. If the "first variable flag" is turned off and the small hit state (S206-10: YES), a negative determination is made in step S206-14-6. That is, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state ("the first variable flag" is on), the processing in steps S206-14 to S206-14-10 is performed, and the variable winning device 32 is If it is in the closed state (the "first variable flag" is off), the processes in steps S206-14-5 and S206-14-11 to S206-14-13 are performed.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, after step S206-14-10-1, in step S206-14-10-2, the value of the "remaining open number counter" is decremented by one. Subsequently, in step S206-14-10-3, setting processing of the "first variable timer" is performed. In step S206-14-10-3, the "first variable timer" determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the small winning, the predetermined special prize In order to determine whether or not an interval from the end of the state to the start of the next special prize state has elapsed, etc., the predetermined value (for example, “1 second "250" corresponding to "" is set.

  Following step S206-14-10-3, in step S206-14-10-4, it is determined whether or not the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". Here, if the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S206-14-10-4: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-14-10-5 and stored in the ROM 502 Based on the closed eye command table [see FIG. 56 (b)], the setting process of "xx close eye command" is performed (in addition, in "xx", the variable winning device 32 after the small hit occurs. The number of releases, that is, the value of the "number of releases counter" is substituted). After setting the “xx closing command”, the process ends.

  The “xx closing command” corresponds to the “xx round closing command” set at the time of the jackpot, and is set only at the small hitting. Further, in the present embodiment, the “xx closing command” has the same configuration as the “xx round closing command”. That is, the "xx closing command" has a 2-byte configuration, the upper byte is configured by the information corresponding to the effect being closed, and the lower byte is the value of the "opening number counter", that is, the number of times in the small hit It is comprised by the information (In this embodiment, the value of "the frequency | count counter of opening") which shows whether it is closing operation. Also, since the "xx close command" has the same configuration as the "xx round close command", the control process when the "xx close command" is received in the sub control device 262, and "xx round" There is no difference from the control process when the closing command is received, and the same process is performed. Furthermore, the “xx closing command” is set according to the number of closings of the variable winning device 32. For example, the “first closing command” is set for the first closing, and the “second closing command for the second closing "Is set.

  The sub controller 262 stores the relationship between the “xx closing command” and the effect during closing in the form of a table, and when the sub controller 262 receives the “xx closing command”, the display controller 45 Is controlled to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute a closing effect corresponding to the received "xx closing command".

  In the setting process of "xx closing command" in step S206-14-10-5, "gaming state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3", so "CBxx" is selected as "xx closing command". It is set. After setting the “xx closing command”, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-10-4, that is, if the "gaming state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", step S206-14-10-6. And “CCxx” is set as the “xx close command”. After setting the “xx closing command”, the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of "small hit", as in the case of "2R probability variation big hit", etc., in the decorative symbol display device 42, an effect during opening and a effect during closing are alternately performed. In this way, a series of small hitting middle staging (incapable of distinguishing between open directing and closed directing) is configured to be performed.

  For example, the sub controller 262 which receives “BBxx” as “xx open command” and “CBxx” as “xx close command” controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol display device 42. For example, the following small hit middle effect is performed in the display unit 42 a of That is, the small hitting medium effect at this time is, for example, an effect to be executed immediately before the ending effect indicating transition to the “latency effect mode” as shown in FIG. In the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and the like occurs, it is the same effect as "big hit medium effect".

  In addition, the sub controller 262 which has received “BCxx” as “xx open command” and received “CCxx” as “xx close command” controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol display device 42. For example, the following small hit middle effect is performed in the display unit 42 a of That is, the small hitting medium effect at this time is, for example, an effect to be executed immediately before the ending effect indicating transition to the "time reduction effect mode" as shown in FIG. It is the same effect as the "big hit medium effect" when the "2R time junior high hit" or the like occurs.

  In the present embodiment, in the “xx open command” and “xx close command” to be set, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured to be common information (for example, “xx open” When "BCxx" is set as the command and "CCxx" is set as the "xx close command", the lower 4 bits "C" of the upper byte are common. Therefore, in the first small hit special prize state start process at the small hit time, the common information is acquired by performing the case division process (S206-13-4), and then “xx open command” and When setting the xx closing command, the acquired common information may be used without performing the case division process (S206-13-4, S206-14-10-4). In this case, the processing load can be reduced.

  Referring back to FIG. 31, when the determination in step S206-14-6 is negative, the process proceeds to step S206-14-11, and it is determined whether the value of the "first variable timer" is "0". Do. If the negative determination is made in step S206-14-6, that is, if the "first variable flag" is off, the value of the "first variable timer" is the remaining time of the interval time. There is. Therefore, the process of step S206-14-11 is a process of determining whether or not it is within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of the winning or during an interval between the special prize states).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-11, that is, a predetermined time elapses from the end of the special prize state, and it is time to shift to the next process (start of next special prize state or start of ending effect) If it does, the process proceeds to step S206-14-12. On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S206-14-11, this processing is ended as it is.

  In step S206-14-12, it is determined whether or not the small hitting state is to be ended, in consideration of the “small hitting end flag”. If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-12, the small winning special prize state start process is performed in step S206-14-13, and then the process ends. The small hit special prize state start process in step S206-14-13 is the same as the process in step S206-13.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-12, after the small hitting end setting process is performed in step S206-14-5, the present process is ended.

  In the small hitting end setting process of step S206-14-5, the "small hitting middle flag" and the "small hitting end flag" are turned off, and the "playing state notification command", the "ending command", the "return counter", A setting process of "return flag" and "return process suggestion command" is performed.

  In addition, with "return processing suggestion command", at the time of the usual fluctuation after the small hitting state, in order to do the "return processing suggestion effect" which suggests execution of "return processing (return production)" in the decorative symbol display device 42, It is output to the sub controller 262. The “return processing suggestion effect” is performed to indicate to the player that “return processing (return effect)” is to be performed. In the "return process suggestion effect", for example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, an effect such as displaying a predetermined display (for example, a character or the like) that does not appear in the normal "time reduction effect mode" is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 42, the display control device 45 is controlled when the function of the main control device 261 that performs the process of setting the "return processing suggestion command" and the "return processing suggestion command" are received. A second information transmitting unit is configured by the function of the sub-control device 262 that performs the "return process suggestion effect" and the decorative symbol display device 42 in which the "return process suggestion effect" is performed.

  Next, the “small hitting end setting process” in step S206-14-5 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S206-14-5-1, it is determined with reference to the "lottery mode flag" whether or not the "high probability mode" is set. Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-5-1, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-2, and it is determined whether or not the “playing state determination value Xj” is “4”. Do. That is, it is determined whether or not the effect mode at the current point in time is the "probable effect mode".

  Here, when the "gaming state determination value Xj" is set to "4" (S206-14-5-2: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-3, and "return flag" Turn on. When the "return flag" is turned on, that is, when "small hit" occurs while the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode", the effect mode is temporarily "high probability mode" in appearance. It is set to the "time-saving effect mode" in which it can not be determined whether or not. However, as described above, the return process is performed after the predetermined number of times of variable display, and the process returns to the "probability change effect mode" which clearly indicates that the "high probability mode" is selected.

  Subsequently, in step S206-14-5-4, processing for setting the "return counter" is performed. As described above, the “return counter” is a numerical value that defines the occurrence timing of the return processing to the “probable-effect production mode”. After the “return flag” is set, when the same number of fluctuation display as the “return counter” is performed, the return process (S205-16-8) is executed, and the return to the “probability change effect mode” occurs. It will be done.

  Further, as an initial value of the "counter for return", a value based on counters (per random number counter C1, jackpot type determination counter C2, reach selection counter C3, etc.) used when the main controller 261 performs processing is set. . In the present embodiment, for example, a numerical value obtained by adding “1” to the numerical value (the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2) stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is set as the initial value of the “return counter”. That is, one of “1 to 50” is randomly set as the “return counter”. Note that the initial value of the "return counter" may be set based on another counter such as the random number counter C1 or the reach selection counter C3. Alternatively, a predetermined numerical value defined in advance may be set as the initial value of the "return counter". In addition, it is preferable to set the numerical value below the number of continuations (100 times) of the "high support mode" in the "time saving mode" to the initial value of the "counter for return". For example, the initial value of the "return counter" is the same as the number of continuations of the "high support mode" in the "time saving mode", and the "return effect" at the same timing as the transition to the "normal effect mode" in the "time saving mode". May be performed, and it may be configured to return to the "probability change production mode".

  After step S206-14-5-4, in step S206-14-5-5, whether or not the value of the "winning counter Vx" is 1 or more, that is, in the small hitting state, the game to the variable winning device 32 It is determined whether or not a ball has been won. Here, if the value of the "winning counter Vx" is 1 or more (S206-14-5-5: YES), the "return processing suggestion command" is set in step S206-14-5-6, It transfers to step S206-14-5-7. On the other hand, when the value of the "winning counter Vx" is less than 1 (S206-14-5-5: NO), step S206-14-5- is performed without setting the "return processing suggestion command". Migrate to 7. In other words, winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state not only the game ball is obtained, it also provides the player with benefits such as execution decision of "return processing suggestion effect" after small hit, "return processing suggestion By confirming the execution of the effect, it is possible for the player to return to the “probable effect mode” and to grasp the situation before the execution of the processing.

  In the subsequent step S206-14-5-7, the "ending command" is set. The “ending command” is set based on the ending command table (see FIG. 55). Specifically, the "ending command" is selected from the ending command table based on the "game state determination value Xj", the "lottery mode flag", and the various "big hit flags" and "small hit winning flags". In step S206-14-5-7, since "gaming state determination value Xj" is "4" and "small hit flag" is on, "EC" is set as "ending command" . In addition, when "EC" is set as "ending command", "shorting-ready ending effect" is displayed on the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the same manner as when "2R hour short / long jackpot" occurs in the "probability change effect mode". Will be executed.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-8, where "2" is set as the "gaming state determination value Xj". That is, when the "small hit" occurs in the "probable change effect mode", the effect mode after the small hit is set to the "time-saving effect mode". Thereafter, in step S206-14-5-9, a "playing state notification command" is set. Next, in step S206-14-5-10, the "small hit flag" is turned off, and the process ends.

  Further, in the case where the "gaming state determination value Xj" is not "4" in step S206-14-5-2 (S206-14-5-2: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-11. It is determined whether or not the “playing state determination value Xj” is “3”, that is, whether or not the current rendering mode is the “latency rendering mode”. When an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-5-11, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-12, and "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. In step S206-14-5-12, since "gaming state determination value Xj" is "3" and "small hit flag" is on, "EB" is set as "ending command" . Then, after the setting of the "playing state notification command" in step S206-14-5-9 and the turning off of the "small hit flag" in step S206-14-5-10, the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the "gaming state determination value Xj" is not "3" in step S206-14-5-11 (S206-14-5-11: NO), that is, the effect mode is "time reduction effect mode" ("game If the state determination value Xj is 2) and the "high probability mode" is set, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-13. Then, in step S206-14-5-13, the "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2” and is “high probability mode” and “small hit flag” is on, “EC” is set as “ending command”. Ru. Then, after the setting of the "playing state notification command" in step S206-14-5-9 and the turning off of the "small hit flag" in step S206-14-5-10, the present process is ended.

  By the way, when a negative determination is made in step S206-14-5-1, that is, when a small hit occurs in the "low probability mode", the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-14, and "game It is determined whether the state determination value Xj is "1" or "3".

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-5-14, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-15, and "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since “game state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” and is “low probability mode” and “small hit flag” is on, “EB” as “ending command” "Is set. Furthermore, in step S206-14-5-16, "gaming state determination value Xj" is set to "3". That is, the rendering mode from the time of the next fluctuation is set to the “latency rendering mode”. Then, after the setting of the "playing state notification command" in step S206-14-5-9 and the turning off of the "small hit flag" in step S206-14-5-10, the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S206-14-5-14, it shifts to Step S206-14-5-17, and "ending command" is set as "EC". Then, after the setting of the "playing state notification command" in step S206-14-5-9 and the turning off of the "small hit flag" in step S206-14-5-10, the present process is ended.

  In the "small hitting end setting process" (S206-14-5), the value of the "lottery mode flag" is not changed unlike the "big hit ending setting process" (S206-9-11). The value of the "lottery mode flag" at the time of small hit occurrence is maintained as it is. That is, when a winning result is obtained by the second success / failure lottery (when a "small hit" occurs), the first winning probability at the time when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is. For example, when the "high probability mode" is set before the occurrence of the small hitting state (when the flag value of the "lottery mode flag" is "53"), the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small hitting ends. (“Lottery mode flag flag value“ 53 ”) is maintained.

  Note that various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output process of the next normal process based on the on / off state of the “first variable flag”. When the "first variable flag" is on, a control signal indicating that the special winning opening 32a is opened is output to the variable winning device 32, and the special winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, when the "first variable flag" is off, a control signal to the effect that the big winning opening 32a is closed is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening 32a is closed.

  In the variable winning device control process, when a big hit occurs, the big hit special prize sending process in step S206-9-7, the open end setting process in step S206-9-6, and step S206-8, step S206- In the 9-10 jackpot special prize state start process, the "first variable flag" is switched alternately. As a result, during the jackpot, the opening and closing process in the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the number of times of opening of the variable winning device 32 reaches the prescribed number (two times, eight times, or sixteen times).

  On the other hand, when a small hit occurs, the small win special prize sending process in step S206-14-10, the open end setting process in step S206-14-9, and step S206-13, step S206-. In the small hit special prize state start process of 14-13, the "first variable flag" is switched alternately. As a result, during the small hit, the opening and closing process in the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly performed normally until the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened reaches the prescribed maximum number (twice). However, opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 is forcibly terminated when the total number of winning game balls for the variable winning device 32 in the small hitting state becomes equal to or more than the maximum number M1 of possible winning combinations.

  In addition, the "opening command" set in the above-mentioned variation end setting process (S205-16) and the "xx round open command (xx open command)" set in the variable winning device control process (S206), “Xx round closing command (xx closing command)”, “ending command”, and “playing state determination value Xj” after the end of the hit are shown in FIG. 57 in each “playing state determination value Xj” and “lottery mode”. As shown in. In FIG. 57, “opening command”, “xx round open command (xx open command)”, “xx round close command (xx closed command)”, “ending command”, and “playing state determination performed after hit” It shows in order of value Xj.

  That is, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" (when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode", or the "game state determination value Xj" is "3" (the effect mode is " When the “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit” occurs when the drawing mode is the “low probability mode” and the drawing mode is “low probability mode”, the same respectively "Opening command", "xx round opening command (xx opening command)", "xx round closing command (xx closing command)", "ending command" and "gaming state determination value Xj" are set. In this case, the "support mode flag" is changed or maintained to the "low support mode", and the symbols displayed at the time of the change stop are the same (a combination of special symbols It is.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), after the same stop symbol is displayed, “Latent-accommodating opening presentation”, “Latent-accommodating big hit medium presentation” and “Latent-acquiring ending effect” are performed, Next, it becomes the "latency effect mode" to which the "low support mode" is given. Therefore, the player is the lottery mode "high probability mode" ("2R probability variation hit" has occurred) from the effects such as the opening effect, the effect mode after the end of the hit, the stop symbol of the hit, etc., It can not be determined whether it is the "low probability mode" (whether "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" has occurred).

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 57, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “4” (the effect mode is “probable change effect mode”), or the “playing state determination value Xj” is “2”. Yes (when the production mode is "time reduction production mode"), and when the lottery mode is "high probability mode", when "2R time junior high hit", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs Are respectively set with the same "opening command", "xx round open command (xx open command)", "xx round close command (xx closed command)", "ending command" and "gaming state determination value Xj" Be done. Further, in this case, the "support mode flag" is maintained in the "high support mode", and the symbols displayed at the time of the change stop are also the same (combination of the specified symbols).

  Therefore, the lottery mode is maintained in the "high probability mode" when the "small hit" occurs, while the lottery mode is the "low probability mode" when the "2R hour junior high hit" or the "2R normal jackpot" occurs. As shown in FIG. 58 (b), between “small hit” and “2R time-long hit” etc., the effects such as the opening effect and the effect mode after the hit end, the hit time There is no difference in stop symbols, and they are the same. Further, in the present embodiment, when the occurrence of "2R hour shorts hit" or the like, the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 42, and when the "small hit" occurs, the decorative symbol The display unit 42 displays dummy information in the same manner as the remaining number of fluctuations. Therefore, the player can not determine whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" or the "low probability mode" based on the opening effect and the like and the effect mode at the time of fluctuation.

  However, if the game mode shifts to the "time reduction effect mode" due to a big hit such as "2R time junior high hit", if the big hit is not won, the "normal production mode" is displayed after a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment). If the transition to the "time-saving effect mode" is made along with the small hit, it will return to the "probable-change effect mode" after the execution of the return effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, when “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit” occurs, the same “opening command” or “xx round open command (xx open command)” in each effect mode. , “Xx round closing command (xx closing command)”, “ending command”, and “playing state determination value Xj” are set. Moreover, the symbols displayed at the time of the fluctuation stop are also the same (combination of the prescribed symbols). On the other hand, when "2R normal jackpot" occurs, the lottery mode shifts (falls) to "low probability mode", but when "small hit" occurs, the current lottery mode is maintained as it is. Therefore, for example, in the "probability effect mode" of the "high probability mode", when the "2R normal jackpot" or the "small hit" occurs, the winning lottery mode after the hit is maintained in the "high probability mode" It can not be judged on the appearance whether it has shifted to the "low probability mode". Therefore, the player can expect to maintain the “high probability mode”, and can enjoy the new fun that has never been done, while making a rush. In this regard, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest.

  Now, returning to the normal processing of FIG. 10, the second display control processing is executed in step S207 following the variable winning control processing in step S206. In this process, the control content of the normal symbol display device 41 is set to determine what kind of control is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. Next, the second display control process of step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S207-1, whether or not the variation display by the normal symbol display device 41 is in view of the setting status of the "second display flag" indicating whether the variable symbol display is in the normal symbol display device 41 or not It is determined whether or not. Specifically, when the "second display flag" is on, it is considered that the variable display is being performed in the normal symbol display device 41, and when the "second display flag" is off, the normal symbol display is displayed. It is considered that the stop display corresponding to the state in which the variable display is stopped in the device 41 is being displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S207-1, the process proceeds to step S207-2, and it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than zero. At this time, when the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the present process ends.

  If the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than "0", the process proceeds to step S207-3. In step S207-3, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In the following step S207-4, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the normal fluctuation suspension area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas reserved in the normal change suspension area to the execution area side, and the first area reserved → the execution area, the second area reserved → The data in each area is shifted in such a way as the first holding area, the third holding area, the second holding area, the fourth holding area, and the third holding area.

  Thereafter, in step S207-5, start setting processing is performed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the condition for performing variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is satisfied. Specifically, the "second display flag" is turned on, and the setting process of the "second display timer" is performed. The "second display timer" is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. It will be taken into consideration when you

  In the present embodiment, in the “low support mode”, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds. Therefore, in consideration of the "support mode flag", in the case of the "low support mode", "500" is set in the "second display timer". In the "high support mode", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds. Therefore, in consideration of the “support mode flag”, in the case of the “high support mode”, “100” is set to the “second display timer”. Then, after the end of step S207-5, the second display control process is ended.

  When the control signal indicating that the variable display is to be started is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal processing based on the setting in the start setting process, the normal symbol display device 41 changes. Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display "o" or "x" as the normal symbol.

  By the way, if the affirmative determination is made in step S207-1, that is, if the variable display is being performed by the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S207-6, and the second display timer subtraction process is performed. Every time this process is performed once, the count value of the "second display timer" is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S207-7, and it is determined whether the count value of the “second display timer” is “0”, that is, whether the fluctuation time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S207-7, the "second display flag" is turned off in step S207-8, and the normal symbol stop for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 in step S207-9 Make display settings. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is output. That is, the symbol "o" (the symbol won) is stopped and displayed (for example, only for a few seconds) if it is won, and it is stopped and displayed if it is not.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not a winning is made based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal change suspension area. Specifically, among the numbers 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter C4, the winning value is one "0" in the "low support mode", and eight "0 to 7" in the "high support mode" It is.

  After the normal symbol stop display setting in step S207-9, the process proceeds to step S207-10, the variation end time setting process is performed, and the present process is ended. In the variation processing time setting process, when the stop display corresponds to the winning, the setting process for performing the opening / closing process of the motorized prize 37 is performed. Specifically, the "second variable flag" is turned on, and the open time is set in the "second variable timer".

  The “second variable flag” is state determination information for determining whether or not the motorized control article 37 is in the open state.

  The “second variable timer” is a means for measuring the open time (remaining time) of the motorized prize 37, and is used to determine whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of open. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the motorized symbol 37 differs between the “high support mode” and the “low support mode”, and in the “high support mode”, “1000” is set for the second variable timer. In the "low support mode", "100" is set for the second variable timer.

  Now, if a negative determination is made in step S207-7, in step S207-11, switching display setting for continuously performing variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and the present process is ended. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that switching display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is output. Specifically, if the current lighting is "o", the display is switched to "x", and when it is "x", the display is switched to "o". Thereby, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

  Returning to FIG. 10, after the end of the second display control process of step S207, the process proceeds to step S208, and the motorized prize control process is executed. In this process, setting of control contents of the motorized prize 37 is performed to control what kind of control is performed in the motorized prize 37. Next, the motorized prize control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S208-1, it is determined whether the "second variable flag" indicating whether or not the motorized control product 37 is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the “second variable flag” is not on (the motorized product 37 is in the closed state), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S208-1, that is, if the "second variable flag" is on, it is considered that the motorized jack 37 is in the open state, and the second variable timer is subtracted in step S208-2. Do the processing. Every time this process is performed once, the value of the "second variable timer" is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S208-3, and the value of the “second variable timer” after the above subtraction is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether the defined open time has elapsed. Here, when the defined open time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the “second variable timer” becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S208-3. If a negative determination is made here, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S208-3, the process proceeds to step S208-4, the end setting process is performed in step S208-4, and the present process is ended. In the end setting process of step S208-4, a process of turning off the "second variable flag" is performed.

  Note that various control signals are output to the motorized prize 37 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the on / off state of the “second variable flag”. When the "second variable flag" is on, a control signal to the effect that the movable blade 37a is opened is output to the motorized product 37, and the motorized product 37 is opened. On the other hand, when the "second variable flag" is off, a control signal to the effect that the movable blade 37a is closed is output to the electric combination 37, and the electric combination 37 is closed. As a result, winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B becomes impossible.

  Returning to FIG. 10, following the motorized product control process of step S208, in step S209, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power failure is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if occurrence information of power-off is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has come, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal processing (this embodiment Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1, CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. The process is repeatedly executed (steps S211 and S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (398 in this example).

  In step S212, the change type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this example). Then, the change values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of step S201-S209 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the random number counter C1) by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using such remaining time, and the fluctuation similarly occurs. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  By the way, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is turned off. It will be. In the power failure process, the generation of each interrupt process is first inhibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is backed up in step S215. Remember to Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power is shut off is transmitted to another control device (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S217, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the RAM access is inhibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process can not be executed.

  Note that the process of step S209 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the change in gaming state performed at steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is small compared to the case where each processing is halfway And can be easily stored. In addition, when returning to the state before the power is shut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before storing data (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off, and the state before the power shutoff can be reliably stored. .

  Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first, the reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 36, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that in the drawing, the processing by the payout control device 311 is denoted by the reference numeral starting from S5.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily put on standby, and a reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step S501, the command transmitted from main controller 261 is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513, and in step S502, it is stored that the command has been transmitted from main controller 261. The "command reception flag" is turned on to complete the present reception interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer for storing the next received command in the next storage area Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed in the interrupt process which is executed when the command is received. For example, as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S 551) is performed, whether or not the command is received is confirmed, and if the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The "command reception flag" may be turned on, and when the command is not received, the process may shift to the command determination process. In such a case, by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received.

  Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started in response to a reset at the time of power on.

  First of all, in step S511, an initial setting process associated with power on is performed. Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value determined in advance, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted in step S512, and the external interrupt vector is set in step S513.

  Thereafter, in step S514, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if occurrence information of power-off is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S515, and in the subsequent step S516, is the RAM determination value coincident with the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off? It is determined whether or not the backup is effective. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 513. In addition, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 is correctly stored.

  In the case where the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S514 (S514: NO), or in the case where the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) in step S516 (S516: NO) Then, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 513 after step S523.

  In step S523, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S524, an initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S525, CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step S522 to permit an interrupt.

  On the other hand, under the condition that the occurrence information of power-off is set in step S514 and that the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S516 (S514: YES, S516: YES). Execute processing at power-on (processing at power-off recovery). That is, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored in step S517, the power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S518, and the "payout permission flag" for permitting payout of the prize ball is cleared in step S519. In step S520, CPU peripheral devices are initialized. In step S521, the use register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S522, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S522, it is determined in the process of step S526 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power is shut off, so that the processes after step S527 are performed as the power failure process at the time of the power-off. In the power failure process, the generation of each interrupt process is first inhibited in step S527, and the command determination process is executed in the next step S528.

  Next, command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the “command reception flag” is turned on in step S528-1. The “command reception flag” is turned on when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in the reception interrupt process (see FIG. 36) described above is received.

  If it is determined in step S528-1 that the "command reception flag" is off (S528-1: NO), no new command has been received from the main control device 261, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S528-1 that the "command reception flag" is on (S528-1: YES), the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S528-2, and "command reception in step S528-3 Turn off the flag. By turning off the “command reception flag” in step S528-3, the processing of steps S528-2 to S528-11 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control load on the payout control device 311 is reduced. It can also be done.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the process of steps S528-4 to S528-6. In step S528-4, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from main control device 261 is a "payment initialization command", and in step S528-5, it is determined whether it is a "payment recovery command" or not. At S528-6, it is determined whether or not it is a "prize ball command".

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "dispense initialization command", it is determined in step S528-7 whether or not the "dispense permission flag" has already been turned on, and the "dispense permission flag" is turned off. If it is (S 528-7: NO), it means that the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the main control unit 261 when the power is turned on, so the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 in step S 528-8 Is cleared to 0, and an initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S528-9. Thereafter, the "payout permission flag" is turned on in step S528-11, and the payoff permission for the winning balls is set.

  As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process (steps S112 and S113) of the RAM 503 after transmitting the “delivery initialization command” (step S111), and the payout control device 311 Since the initialization process (steps S528-8 and S528-9) of the RAM 513 is performed after receiving the initialization command (step S528-4), the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the RAM 513 are initialized. Timing is almost the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the timing of initialization being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command can not be performed, etc. Can prevent the occurrence of negative effects. Further, since the “payout permission flag” is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the winning balls can be surely set.

  On the other hand, if the “payout permission flag” has already been turned on in step S528-7, this command determination process ends without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S528-7 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized in a state in which the "payout permission flag" is set. Note that the “delivery initialization command” is a command that is transmitted only when the payout control device 311 performs initialization processing along with the power on, for example, when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is on, “ In this case, it is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized as the “dispense initialization command” due to the influence of noise or the like when the “permission permission flag” is not turned on. Therefore, when the clear of the work area of the RAM 513 (step S528-8) and the setting of the initial value of the RAM 513 (step S528-9) are executed while the "payout permission flag" is on, the winning balls remain. In such a case, a bad effect such as not being paid out causes loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized when the “payout permission flag” is turned on, It can prevent giving a loss.

  In addition, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “payout return command” (S528-4: NO, S528-5: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 are in the state before the power is shut off. Since the process returns, in order to permit the payout of the winning balls, the "payout permission flag" is turned on in step S528-11. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of the power failure and the main controller 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power is shut off, the payout of the winning balls is permitted. When the "payout permission flag" is turned on in the process of step S528-11, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer goes to the next storage area. It is updated to the corresponding read pointer.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a "winning ball command" (S528-5: NO, step S528-6: YES), the number of winning balls received in step S528-10 is determined to be a total winning ball. The "payout permission flag" is turned on in step S528-11 in order to permit addition and storage of the number and to allow payout of the winning balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the "prize ball commands" stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and the number of the prize balls corresponding to the command is stored in the predetermined buffer area. Add to and store. Since the payout of the winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls is performed based on the “winning ball command” transmitted from the main control device 261, the “winning ball command” is a payout instructing command instructing payout of the winning balls. . Further, when the "winning ball command" is received, since the payout permission is set immediately, it is possible to promptly pay out the winning balls with respect to the winning. When the "payout permission flag" is turned on in the process of step S528-11, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer corresponds to the next storage area. The read pointer is updated.

  The command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a "dispense initialization command" (S528-4: NO) nor a "dispense return command" (step S528-5: NO), even a "prize ball command". If not (step S528-6: NO), the command determination process is ended without turning on the "payout permission flag".

  Returning to FIG. 37, following the command determination process of step S528, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S529, and the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a in step S530. In step S531, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. In step S532, the RAM access is inhibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process can not be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 513.

  In the process of step S526, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed after the process performed at the time of power-on, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is compared with the case where each process is in process. Less and easier to remember. In addition, when returning to the state before the power is shut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is periodically (in this embodiment, 2 msec cycle) activated.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S551, a command from the main control device 261 is obtained, and a determination process of the command is performed. The command determination process is the same process as step S528 described above.

  When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step S552 whether or not the "payout permission flag" is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the “payout permission flag” is not turned on, the present process is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the payout of the prize ball from being performed before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S552, the emission permission is set for the emission control device 312 in step S553, the state recovery switch 321 is checked in step S554, and the state recovery operation start is determined. Execute recovery operation. By this processing, for example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs such as ball clogging of the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse to resolve the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S555, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full tray condition of the lower tray 15 is judged by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray full is reached, the setting of the lower tray full condition is executed and the lower tray full , Set the lower plate full release state. Further, in step S556, the setting of the tank ball absent state (ball out state) or the tank sphere absent state (ball present state) is executed according to the change of the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball absence state is determined by the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, and the tank sphere absence state is executed when the tank sphere absence is reached, and the tank sphere absence released state is executed when the tank sphere absence is eliminated. Execute the setting.

  Thereafter, in step S557, for example, it is determined whether there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, notification is made.

  Subsequently, a payout control process of winning balls and rental balls is executed. In more detail, the payout amount setting process is performed in step S558, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S559, and the motor drive process is performed in step S560.

  In step S561, the state recovery switch 321 is checked, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal processing on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started. In the subsequent step S562, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

  Next, the normal processing of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawings, the processing in the sub control device 262 is denoted by the reference numeral starting from S7.

  First, in step S701, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S702. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is configured of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261.

  The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all the storage areas, It is configured to return to the beginning and update the command. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the storage and the reading of the command are performed based on the respective pointers.

  In the following step S703, command determination processing is performed. Here, the command determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S703-1, the received command is read from the command buffer of the RAM 553. In the subsequent step S703-2, the type of the command is determined.

  If the command transmitted from main controller 261 is the "initialization command", it means that initialization of RAM 553 is instructed from main controller 261 at the time of power on, so RAM 553 is cleared in step S703-3. The initial value of the RAM 553 is set in step S703-4. As a result, in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553, the value “1” of the “gaming state determination value Xj” corresponding to the “normal effect mode” which is the initial setting is stored. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a "return command", main controller 261 returns to the state before the power was turned off, so sub-control device 262 having no backup function performs step S703-5. Then, the value (any one of “1” to “4”) of “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the return command is read and stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. Thereafter, the process ends.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "playing state notification command", the "playing state notification" is received in step S703-5 as in the case where the transmitted command is a "return command". The “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the command is read out and stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is "hold control command", in step S703-6, various information (big hit determination information or big hit type information, start winning opening 33A, 33B, storage processing is performed to store information indicating which of the wins is a variable display triggered by a win, etc., in the sub change suspension area, and the present process is ended.

  The sub fluctuation reserve area is provided corresponding to the special fluctuation reserve area of the main controller 261. That is, the sub variation suspension area includes a first sub variation suspension area corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33A and a second sub variation suspension area corresponding to the lower start winning opening 33B, and one sub execution area. Each of the sub variation hold areas includes four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas).

  In each hold area, the reception history (reception order) of the "hold control command" and the winning history of the gaming ball included in the "hold control command" (whichever is the start winning opening 33A or 33B) Information (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type information) related to the variable display executed by the decorative symbol display device 42 is stored in time series according to the above. Thereby, the sub control device 262 can grasp the number of pending variable displays and the contents thereof.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "symbol command", symbol setting processing is performed in step S703-7, and this processing is ended.

  In the symbol setting process of step S703-7, the symbol stored in the counter buffer (refer to FIG. 44) of the RAM 553 (described later) is displayed based on the hit type information stored in the reserve area of the sub change reserve area. The sub execution area is set as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the device 42.

  In more detail, when "B1" is set to "design command", the combination of one of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 Zoro is decided as a stop design. On the other hand, when "B2" is set to "design command", the combination of one of the symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 is selected as the stop symbol. In addition, when “B3” is set in “design command”, the combination of the symbols stored in the back and forth reach reach symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "B4" is set in "symbol command", the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the back and forth deviation is determined as the stop symbol. When "B5" is set in "symbol command", the combination of symbols stored in the completely out of pattern buffer is determined as a stop symbol. When “B6” is set in “design command”, a combination of symbols whose special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined as the stop symbol. When "B7" is set to "symbol command", the combination of the prescribed symbols is determined as the stop symbol. In addition, when "B6" is set to "design command", the symbol displayed in the upper symbol display area and the symbol displayed in the lower pattern display area symbol are out of order by the sub control device 262, reach symbol buffer Or, the symbol of the upper symbol display area and the symbol of the lower pattern display region symbol stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the back and forth deviation are selected.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the "variation pattern command", it is the timing to start the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42, so the start setting process is performed in step S703-8, and step S703. Move to -9.

  In the start setting process of step S703-8, various settings relating to the variable display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed.

  In this start setting process, as in the case of the special variation suspension area of the main control device 261, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the sub variation suspension area to the sub execution area side is executed. Subsequently, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received "variation pattern command" is set to the "variation display timer". The "variation display timer" is means for measuring the fluctuation time (the remaining time of fluctuation display) in the decorative symbol display device 42, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display.

  Further, in the start setting process, the "variation display flag", which is referred to when determining whether or not the variation display is being performed by the decorative symbol display device 42, is turned on.

  Furthermore, in the start setting process, based on the "gaming state determination value Xj" included in the received "variation pattern command", the rendering mode ("normal rendering mode", "time reduction rendering mode") in the decorative symbol display device 42, " While determining the latent presentation effect mode "or" probability change production mode "), the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display of the symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information (variation mode) stored in the" variation pattern command ". In addition, a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time has elapsed is determined based on the hit type information (including “off”). Information on the fluctuation pattern, the effect mode ("playing state judgment value Xj"), and the stop symbol determined here is additionally written to the sub execution area of the sub fluctuation suspension area. Mode information storage means in the present embodiment is configured by the RAM 553 storing the “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the “variation pattern command”. The correspondence between the variation time information and the variation pattern in each effect mode and the correspondence between the jackpot type information and the stop symbol are stored in the form of a table in the ROM 552 of the sub control device 262.

  That is, also in the sub controller 262, like the main controller 261, the variation pattern corresponding to "16R probability variation jackpot", the variation pattern corresponding to "8R probability variation jackpot", the variation pattern corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot", Variation pattern corresponding to 2R hourly jackpot, variation pattern corresponding to "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit", variation pattern corresponding to "back and forth reach", fluctuation pattern corresponding to "back and forth reach", and A plurality of table groups corresponding to the values “1” to “4” of the “playing state determination value Xj” are stored with respect to the fluctuation patterns corresponding to “complete removal”.

  Then, the sub-control device 262, when determining the variation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42, based on the "playing state determination value Xj" included in the variation pattern command, the effect mode ("playing state A table corresponding to the values "1" to "4" of the judgment value Xj is selected. Then, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the selected table.

  Furthermore, in the start setting process, when the effect mode is "time reduction effect mode" ("playing state determination value Xj" is "2"), sub controller 262 transmits "support" transmitted from main control device 261 Based on the value of the frequency counter, a command to be transmitted to the display control device 45 is set in order to display the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given in the decorative symbol display device 42. However, even if the effect mode is the "time reduction effect mode", if the "lottery mode" is the "high probability mode" (in addition, the determination as to whether the sub control device 262 is the "high probability mode" is This is performed based on a command including “lottery mode flag” transmitted from main controller 261), and sub controller 262 itself measures the number of times “variation pattern command” has been received since “time reduction effect mode” is set. At the same time, information corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is obtained based on the number of times of measurement. Then, based on the obtained information, the sub-control device 262 sets a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to display information that can be seen on the surface, as the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given. . Note that this information has nothing to do with the remaining number of fluctuations in which the “high support mode” is actually given, and is so-called dummy information. Furthermore, the set command is output to the display control device 45 in the external output processing S710 described later, and the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 to output the command output from the decorative symbol display device 42. Will be displayed. In addition, instead of the information related to the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given, or the dummy information of the remaining number of fluctuations, the total number of fluctuation numbers in the "high support mode" or the total number Dummy information may be displayed.

  Following the start setting in step S703-8, in step S703-9, "gaming state determination value Xj" included in "variation pattern command" and "gaming state determination value stored in the gaming state information storage area of RAM 553. It is determined whether or not "Xj" matches. Here, if the two values match, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the two values are different, the "state error flag" is turned on in step S703-10, and "gaming state determination" included in the newly received "variation pattern command" in step S703-11. The value “Xj” is regarded as appropriate, and the “playing state determination value Xj” is stored in the playing state information storage area. Thereafter, the process ends. By turning on the "state error flag", the error display lamp 104 or the like notifies that the values of both are different. Of course, the error notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and may be configured to perform error notification using the decorative symbol display device 42 or the speaker SP.

  In addition, since the main control device etc. has a backup function in recent game machines, even if the power is shut off due to a power failure etc., various data can be stored and held including the lottery mode etc. at that time, Even if the power is shut off during the "high probability mode", the player can resume the game in the "high probability mode" when the power is restored.

  However, if the backup function is used, it is possible to set the gaming machine in the "high probability mode" from the start of the business in the gaming hall, or to say "morning" as it is commonly used. Such an action is performed to increase the ability to attract customers at the start of business for the game hall, but there is a risk that the player's shooting will be overshadowed by mischief. Although various methods can be considered as the setting method of the said action, As an example, the method which does not carry out initialization reset of the game machine whose lottery mode was "high probability mode" at the time of the business closing on the previous day is mentioned. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is powered on, the main control unit sends information to the sub control unit about the effect mode in the display means such as the liquid crystal display (“playing state determination value Xj”). In the configuration that is transmitted by "Reset command" etc., if the cable connector that connects the main control unit and the sub control unit is removed at the time of power on etc., the sub control unit is actually set by the main control unit The effect mode can not be grasped, and control relating to the initially set effect mode, that is, the “normal effect mode” is performed.

  In a general gaming machine, when performing effects in a display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color etc.) is made different between the "low probability mode" and the "high probability mode". The player or the like can easily grasp the current lottery mode.

  Also, in general, since the sub control device that controls the liquid crystal display device etc. does not have a backup function, when the power is turned off, the control according to the rendering mode ("normal rendering mode") of the initial setting will be performed. .

  Therefore, using this, it is possible to set the effect mode of the liquid crystal display device to the effect mode at the normal time, regardless of the actual lottery mode set by the main control device being the "high probability mode". In such a case, the current lottery mode can not be easily determined by looking at the liquid crystal display device or the like at first glance, so confirmation of this action by a predetermined survey or the like becomes substantially difficult.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the "gaming state determination value Xj" included in the "variation pattern command" and the "gaming state determination value Xj" stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 If it is different, an error notification is issued to that effect, and "gaming state determination value Xj" included in the newly received "variation pattern command" is stored in the gaming state information storage area. That is, the sub control device 262 can grasp the appropriate effect mode at that time. As a result, the action such as "morning" is performed, and the effect mode in the sub control device 262 is normal even though the actual lottery mode set by the main control device 261 is "high probability mode". Even if it becomes an aspect, when the "variation pattern command" is received, it is informed that the effect mode is different, and corresponds to "gaming state determination value Xj" included in the received "variation pattern command" Effects mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress the action such as the "morning" by the gaming hall.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is an "opening command", an opening effect setting process is performed in step S703-12, and the present process is ended.

  In the opening effect setting process of step S703-12, when "AA" is set in the transmitted "opening command", the sub control device 262 executes "16R probability variation corresponding opening effect" in the decoration symbol display device 42 Set the command to In addition, when “AB” is set in “opening command”, a command to execute “8R probability variation opening presentation” in decorative symbol display device 42 is set, and “AC” is set in “opening command”. Is set, the decorative symbol display device 42 sets a command for executing the "latent opening response effect". Furthermore, when "AD" is set in the "opening command", a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute the "time-shortening corresponding opening effect" is set.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the “xx round open command” or the “xx open command”, the effect setting process during open is performed in step S703-13, and this process is ended. In step S703-13, the sub-control device 262 sets a command corresponding to the type of the transmitted "xx round open command (xx open command)".

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the “xx round closing command” or the “xx closing command”, the effect setting process during closing is performed in step S703-14, and this process ends. In step S703-14, the sub-control device 262 sets a command corresponding to the type of the "xx round closing command (xx closing command)" transmitted.

  The command set based on "xx round open command (xx open command)" and the command set based on "xx round close command (xx close command)" are external output processing described later. It is output to the display control device 45 in S710. Then, the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the input command, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a jackpot middle effect or a small hit middle effect.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the "ending command", an ending effect setting process is performed in step S703-15, and the present process is ended.

  In the ending effect setting process of step S703-15, the sub-control device 262 is a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute the "probability-correspondence ending effect" when "EA" is set in the "ending command". Set Further, when "EB" is set in "ending command", a command for causing "decision-ready ending effect" to be performed is set in the decorative symbol display device 42, and "EC" is set in "ending command". Is set, the decorative symbol display device 42 sets a command for executing the "time-shorting corresponding ending effect".

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "return effect command", a return effect setting process is performed in step S703-16, and the process ends. In the return effect setting process of step S703-16, the sub-control device 262 sets a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute "return effect".

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "return processing suggestion command", a return effect setting process is performed in step S703-17, and the present process is ended. In step S703-17, the sub-control device 262 sets a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute "return process suggestion effect".

  The command set corresponding to the "opening command", "ending command", "return effect command" or "return processing suggestion command" is output to the display control device 45 in the external output processing S710 described later, and displayed. When the control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42, effects (opening effect, ending effect, return effect, etc.) corresponding to the output command are performed in the decorative symbol display device 42. In the present embodiment, the display control device 45 cancels these effects and performs an ending effect when a command corresponding to the “ending command” is received when the large hit medium effect or the small hit medium effect is in the middle. Is configured as.

  Referring back to FIG. 40, after step S703 or when a negative determination is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S704, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal processing has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal processing. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since the time t. And when predetermined time has already passed (S704: YES), it transfers to step S705, and on the other hand, when predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the last normal processing (S705: NO) , Shift to step S711.

  In step S705, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, upper, middle, and lower used for setting of each outlying symbol of a large hit decorative symbol counter C5, an upper symbol display region, a middle symbol display region, and a lower symbol display region. Each out-of-design symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The out-of-design symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that the register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are appropriately stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is for determining a symbol (big hit symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in the case of "16R positive variation big hit" or "8R positive variation big hit". In the present embodiment, five odd symbols and five even symbols are set as jackpot symbols. Therefore, five (0 to 4) counter values are prepared as the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 4 and to return to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 4). Then, when the “design command” transmitted from the main control device 261 is “B1” indicating the combination of odd number jackpot symbols, for example, based on a table (a table for correlating counter values and symbols), which is not shown, If the value is 0, it will be "1" (Zoromes), if it is 1, it will be "3" (Zoromes), if it is 2, "5" (Zoromes), if it is 3, "7" (of If Zorome), if 4 is "9" (Zorome) and so on, determine the combination of odd jackpot symbols.

  Also, when the "symbol command" transmitted from the main control device 261 is "B2" indicating the combination of the even jackpot symbols, a counter based on a table not shown (a table for correlating counter values and symbols), for example, a counter If the value is 0, it is "0" (Zoromes), if 1 is "2" (Zoromes), 2 if "4" (Zoromes), 3 if "6" (of If Zorome), 4 "8" (of Zorome) and so on determine the combination of even jackpot symbols.

  The jackpot decoration symbol counter C5 is periodically updated in the counter updating process of step S705, and as described above, when the sub controller 262 receives the "symbol command", it is sent from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 to this The value of the stored jackpot decoration symbol counter C5 is read out. In the present embodiment, the large hit decorative symbol counter C5 is stored in the large hit decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553. However, it is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the "symbol command" is received. You may do it.

  The upper, middle, and lower off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the stop symbols (combination of off symbols) on the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning lottery is "off". Since one of ten symbols is displayed in each column, ten (0 to 9) counter values are prepared for each. The stop symbol of the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper / off symbol counter CL, and the stop symbol of the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle / out symbol counter CM, and the stop symbol of the lower figure display region is determined by the lower / out symbol counter CR. Is determined.

  In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, at the time of updating each out-of-hand symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value and 10 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value to determine the current value. Ru. Each off symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update time does not overlap, and the combination of the off symbol counter CL, CM, CR is the reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the back and forth deviation Completely stored in any of the design buffer.

  Here, the update processing of each out-of-design symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 42, in step S751, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the up / off symbol counter CL, and in step S752, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the inside / off symbol counter CM. In addition, it is comprised so that each top, middle and bottom out-of-out pattern counter CL, CM, CR may be updated one by one sequentially by one update process. Therefore, in the case where the lower / out symbol symbol counter CR is updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative determination is made in step S751. In addition, in the case where the up / off symbol counter CL is updated in the previous updating process, an affirmative determination is made in step S752.

  Then, if it is the time to update the up / off symbol counter CL (step S751: YES), the process proceeds to step S753, and the up / off symbol counter CL is updated. In addition, if it is the time to update the inside / outside symbol counter CM (step S752: YES), the process proceeds to step S754, and the inside / outside symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if it is time to update the lower / out symbol symbol counter (S751: NO, S752: NO), the process proceeds to step S755, and the lower / out symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the out-of-out pattern counters CL, CM, CR in steps S753 to S755, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value and 10 is subtracted if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value The calculation result is taken as the current value of the out-of-pattern counter CL, CM, CR.

  According to the process of updating outlying symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the upper, middle, and lower outlier symbols CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one updating process, and each counter value is updated. There is no overlap in time. As a result, every time the update process is performed three times, one set of the out-of-design symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated.

  After that, in step S756, the combination of the out-of-out pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of reach symbols (the symbol of the upper symbol display region and the symbol of the lower symbol display region are the same, upper and lower symbol display regions It is determined whether or not the symbol of the symbol and the symbol of the middle symbol display area are different), and if it is a combination of reach symbols (S 756: YES), then in step S757 Determine if there is. If the out-of-design counter CL, CM, CR is a combination of back and forth out-of-back reach (out-of-back out-of-back symbol) (S757: YES), the process proceeds to step S758 Store before and after out of reach reach pattern buffer.

  On the other hand, if the out-of-out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach (other than out-of-front out) symbols (S757: NO), the process proceeds to step S759, and the out-of-point symbols counter CL, CM at that time. , CR combinations are stored in the reach pattern buffer except for the back and forth deviation of the RAM 553.

  Also, if it is a combination other than the reach symbol (S 756: NO), the process proceeds to step S 760, and it is determined whether the combination of the out-of-pattern counter CL, CM, CR is the combination of out-of-pattern If it is a combination of symbols (completely out of design) (S760: YES), the process proceeds to step S761 and the combination of outlying symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the completely out of pattern buffer of the RAM 553. In addition, when the steps S756 and S760 are both NO, the symbols are aligned in the upper, middle, and lower, that is, it corresponds to the combination of the big hit symbols, but in such a case, the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are buffered. This processing ends as it is without storing. Further, even when the combination of the out-of-set symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of the specified symbols, the present process is ended without storing the out-of-pattern counters CL, CM, CR in the buffer.

  In addition, in this embodiment, since the combination of symbols is one pattern ("2", "4", "6"), the combination of the prescribed symbols stopped and displayed in the case of "2R time junior high hit" etc. There is no need to use counter information when displaying symbols.

  Referring back to FIG. 40, following step S705, the variable display setting process of step S706 is performed. The variation display setting process is a process mainly for performing variation display or the like of the symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Next, the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in step S706-1, it is determined whether or not variation display is in progress on the decorative symbol display device 42 by looking at the setting status of the "variation display flag". Specifically, when the "variable display flag" is set (in the on state), it is considered as variable display, and when the "variable display flag" is released (in the off state) It is considered that the stop display corresponding to the state in which the variable display is stopped is being displayed. Note that the "variable display flag" is turned on (in the start setting process of step S703-8) when the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started as described above, and the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. Is turned off (in the stop display setting in step S706-5 described later).

  If the determination in step S706-1 is affirmative, that is, if the change is started or in progress, the process proceeds to step S706-2, and if the determination in step S706-1 is negative, the process ends. .

  In step S706-2, variation display timer subtraction processing is performed. Every time this process is performed, the value of the "variation display timer" is decremented one by one. The “variation display timer” is set (in the start setting process of step S703-8) when the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started as described above. Further, since the normal processing in the sub control device 262 is performed every 1 msec, and the value of the “variation display timer” is decremented one by one every 1 msec, for example, in the case where the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec) , “10000” is set for the “variation display timer”.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S706-3, in which the value of the “variation display timer” after the above subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S706-3.

  If a negative determination is made in step S706-3, in step S706-4, variation execution processing for performing variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed, and this processing ends.

  In this variation execution process, for example, various calculation processes such as generation of “display command” to be output to the display control device 45 based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub variation suspension area of the RAM 553 and output setting of the command I do.

  Thereby, the display control device 45 performs drawing processing in accordance with the command from the sub control device 262, and starts the fluctuation display of the symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, along with the change execution process, the effect mode ("normal effect mode", "time reduction effect mode", "latency effect mode" or "probable effect mode") in the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched. That is, the sub control device 262 that executes the variation execution process S706-4 constitutes effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 to various modes. Further, the display control device 45 constitutes an effect control means.

  Furthermore, once the “variation pattern command” is received from main controller 261, until the variation time of the variation display corresponding to the “variation pattern command” has elapsed (set in the start setting process of step S706-8 While the value of the “variation display timer” becomes “0”, the variation display of the symbol is continued under the cooperation of the sub controller 262 and the display controller 45.

  On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S706-3, that is, if it is determined that the value of the "variation display timer" is "0", the stop display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in step S706-5. Stop display setting is performed, and the process ends. In the stop display setting, the “variable display flag” is released (turned off), and setting of a “stop command” for instructing the display control device 45 to stop the variable display in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 40, in the lamp setting process of step S707 following the variable display setting process of step S706, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electric decoration is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 .

  In the sound setting process of step S 708, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a command related to voice is transmitted from the main control device 261, such as notification of error occurrence, setting for performing these controls is also performed in step S708.

  In step S 709, other processing such as control setting of a customer waiting effect (for example, a demonstration screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed while the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not performed) Do.

  In step S710, an external output process is performed to transmit a control signal based on the setting contents of steps S703 to S709 to each device. For example, at the time of the opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 42, the command set corresponding to the "opening command" is transmitted to the display control device 45. In addition, at the time of the fluctuation display of the design by decoration design display device 42, “display command” is transmitted to display control device 45.

  After the processes of steps S705 to S710 performed every 1 msec are executed, or when the determination in step S704 is negative, the process proceeds to step S711, and generation information of power supply interruption is stored in RAM 553 or not. Determine if Incidentally, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored when the "power-off command" is received from the main control device 261.

  If the power-off occurrence information is not stored (S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S712, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 is destroyed. Here, if the RAM 553 is not destroyed (S 712: NO), the process returns to the process of step S 701, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed (S 712: YES), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  If it is determined in step S711 that power failure occurrence information is stored (S711: YES), power failure processing is performed in step S713. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is inhibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased. After execution of the power-off process, the process is looped endlessly.

  Next, the display mode and the like on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described along with the flow of the game by the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, in the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, in the normal state, a variable display area W1 including three upper, middle and lower symbol display areas is set. Further, below the variable display area W1, an instruction display area W2 is set to instruct (recommend) the player how to release the game ball, and further below, the number of pending variable displays is indicated. The hold display area W3 is set.

  The pending display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub variation pending area. That is, the pending display area W3 is divided into a first pending display area W3a and a second pending display area W3b in correspondence to the first sub variation pending area and the second sub variation pending area. Then, in each of the suspension display areas W3a and W3b, suspension images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to four suspension areas (first to fourth suspension areas) are displayed.

  The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are displayed in the off mode (refer to the shaded portion) at normal time (during non-holding), and when the variable display is held in a predetermined holding area, The hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the hold area are configured to be switched and displayed in the lighting mode (see the white circle part).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, the first suspension image TA1 and the second suspension image TA2 of the first suspension display area W3a are displayed in the lighting mode, and the remaining suspension images TA3, TA4, and TB1 to TB4 are in the lighting off mode. The displayed state is shown. That is, the variable display is suspended in the reserved first area and the reserved second area of the first sub variation reserved area, and the number of pendings of the current variable display is "2" states related to the upper start winning opening 33A. It is shown.

  In the "low support mode", an instruction is displayed to recommend an action of the player firing the game ball toward the left side area of the variable display unit 35 (this action is hereinafter referred to as "left strike"). In the area W2, “← 打 ち left” is displayed. In accordance with this, the player plays the game "left strike". The left side area of the variable display unit 35 constitutes a first area in the present embodiment.

  When the player strikes "left", most of the gaming balls are guided by the nail or the like toward the upper start winning opening 33A located below the variable display unit 35. Among them, a number of game balls will be awarded to the upper starting winning opening 33A.

  In the present embodiment, through gate 34 serving as an opening trigger for lower start winning opening 33B (electric accessory 37) flows down the right side area of variable display unit 35, ie, the left side area of variable display unit 35. Game balls are placed at unreachable positions. Furthermore, in the "low support mode", the probability of winning the opening lottery of the lower start winning opening 33B (electric product 37) is relatively low at 1/10. In addition, the gaming balls having flowed down the right side area of the variable display unit 35 are hardly guided by the upper start winning opening 33A by the nails and the like. That is, in the present embodiment, in the "low support mode", the player performs an action of firing the game ball toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 (this action is hereinafter referred to as "right strike"). In this case, it is difficult to win the start winning openings 33A, 33B. Therefore, in the "low support mode", it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the player plays the game with the "left strike". The right side area of the variable display device unit 35 constitutes a second area in the present embodiment.

  When the gaming ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, in the variable display area W1 of the decorative symbol display device 42, a plurality of kinds of symbols are variably displayed for each of the above-mentioned each symbol display area. In the present embodiment, the symbol Z with the numbers "1" to "9" is displayed. The various symbols Z are scrolled and displayed from right to left with periodicity in ascending or descending order of the numbers, thereby forming a series of symbol rows.

  In such a case, in the upper symbol display area, various symbols Z are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing number attached), and in the middle symbol display area and the lower pattern display region, various symbols Z are similarly ascending (attached Displayed in order of increasing numbers). Then, when a predetermined time has passed, the fluctuation display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area, and the symbol Z is stopped and displayed in each symbol display area.

  If you win a winning lottery based on the game ball to the top start winning opening 33A, if you win the "16R probability variation big hit" or "8R probability variation big hit", through reach state, on the predetermined jackpot line, a big hit The symbol Z of the combination of (Zorro eyes arranged in a line) is stopped and displayed. In the normal state ("normal effect mode" and "latency effect mode") of the present embodiment, the jackpot line is configured by left, middle, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (in FIG. Called 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper / middle / lower pattern display area, when three symbols Z of the combination of the big hit are displayed side by side on any of the five lines, "16R positive variation big hit" or "8R positive variation" The occurrence of "big hit" is determined.

  When the player wins the "16R probability variation jackpot", the "16R probability variation opening presentation" is performed on the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 as shown in FIGS. 62 to 66, and a jackpot state occurs. In addition, when “8R probability variation big hit” is won, “8R probability variation corresponding opening effect” is performed in the display section 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 as shown in FIG. 62 to FIG. 64 and FIG. A condition occurs. In the present embodiment, a part of the “16R probability variation corresponding opening presentation” and the “8R probability variation corresponding opening presentation” are effects common to each other, so that the data capacity can be reduced. In the "opening effect", the number of rounds given in the jackpot state may be displayed.

  After the end of "16R probability variation opening effect" or "8R probability variation opening effect", the opening and closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the gaming ball can enter the big winning opening 32a, and thereafter, the predetermined round The opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 32b is performed by the number (16R or 8R). Also, in the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, when the open / close plate 32b is open, the effect during open as shown in FIG. 68 is performed, and when the open / close plate 32b is closed, shown in FIG. Such as during the closing production is performed. By performing the opening effect and the closing effect alternately, a predetermined jackpot effect is performed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the current round is displayed in the jackpot middle effect (during open effect). In the present embodiment, among the big hit during the "16R probability variation big hit" occurrence of the first half part of the production (the production up to the eighth round), when the "8R probability variation big hit" occurred It is the same as the jackpot production being done. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is disposed in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position where the game ball which has flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 can not reach). When the player continues to "hit left", it is difficult to win the game ball to the variable winning device 32. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, in the effect indicating the jackpot type ("16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot") of the opening production, and in the jackpot middle effect, the instruction display area W2 is a game “Right strike →” is displayed so that the player recommends the action (“right strike”) of firing the game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35. Following this, the player switches from "left-handed" to "right-handed" to play a big hit game so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and goes to the right side area of the variable display unit 35 .

  Here, when "right-handed" is made, most of the gaming balls are guided to the variable winning device 32 by the nails and the like, and win to the variable winning device 32. Thereby, the player can acquire more game balls.

  When opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 32b in the variable winning device 32 is performed for a predetermined number of rounds, "probable variation ending effect" is performed on the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 as shown in FIG. Then, the effect mode in the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the next fluctuation is set to the "probable effect mode" (see, for example, FIG. 71). Furthermore, the lottery mode is set to the "high probability mode", and the "next high support mode" is given.

  In the state in which the "high support mode" is given, the indication display area W2 is displayed to recommend "right-handed". Through gate 34 serving as a trigger for opening lower start winning opening 33B (motorized item 37) is disposed in the right side area of variable display unit 35, and in the "high support mode", lower start winning opening 33B The probability of winning in the open lottery of (electric part 37) is relatively high (in the present embodiment, the probability of winning is set to 8/10). Therefore, by performing “right-handed”, most of the gaming balls are likely to win in the lower start winning opening 33B, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed increases and the ball holding state becomes good.

  In addition, in the case where the winning lottery based on the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B is won, and the "16R probability variation big hit" or "8R probability variation big hit" is won, the upper start in the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 The same effect as in the case of winning the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening 33A is performed. In addition, when “16R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” is won, regardless of the effect mode on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 at the time of the jackpot, the decorative symbol from the time of the next change The effect mode in the display unit 42 a of the display device 42 is set to the “probability change effect mode”.

  As shown in FIG. 72, a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area when the player wins a winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B and wins the "2R probability variation big hit". ZS is displayed stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 73, “latency opening response” is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and a jackpot state occurs.

  In the big hit state, while the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is performed a predetermined number of times (two times in this embodiment) in a relatively short time, in the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, The jackpot middle effect is executed following the "latent opening response effect". Then, following the jackpot effect, an ending effect is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot by the effect mode (value of the "gaming state determination Xj") and the lottery mode ("high probability mode" or "low probability mode") at the time of winning the "2R probability variation big hit" The effect and the ending effect, and hence the effect mode from the time of the next change are different.

  Specifically, when the production mode is the “normal production mode” or when the production mode is the “latency production mode” in the “low probability mode”, “2R probability variation jackpot” is won, During the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32, as shown in FIG. 74, the "latent correspondence big hit middle effect" is executed as a big hit middle effect on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. Then, following the jackpot effect, on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, as shown in FIG. 75, "latency corresponding ending effect" is executed as the ending effect. Further, following to the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect mode in the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the time of the next change is set to the “latency effect mode”. Further, the lottery mode is set to the "high probability mode", and the "low support mode" is given.

  On the other hand, when the production mode is the "time reduction production mode" or the "probability variation production mode", or when the production mode is the "latency production mode" in the "high probability mode", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won In this case, following the “latent opening response production”, during the opening and closing operation of the variable winning device 32, as shown in FIG. To be executed. Next, in the display section 42a, "Probably variable ending corresponding production" (see FIG. 70) is executed as the ending production, and after the ending production, the production mode in the display section 42a from the time of the next fluctuation is "probability production mode" (Fig. (See 71). Furthermore, the lottery mode is set to the "high probability mode", and the "next high support mode" is given.

  When the player wins a winning lottery based on the game ball winning to the lower start winning opening 33B and wins the "2R time junior high hit", as shown in FIG. 78, the combination of the prescribed symbols is stopped and displayed In the section 42a, "time-shortening corresponding opening presentation" is performed, and a jackpot state occurs. And while opening / closing in the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is performed a predetermined number of times (two times in the present embodiment) in a relatively short time, in the display section 42a, as shown in FIG. As a production, "time-saving correspondence big hit middle production" is executed. Then, following the jackpot middle effect, as shown in FIG. 80, “time-shortening corresponding ending effect” is executed as the ending effect on the display unit 42a. Furthermore, after the ending effect (after the end of the jackpot state), as shown in FIG. 81, the effect mode in the display unit 42a from the time of the next fluctuation is set to the “time-saving effect mode”. Further, the lottery mode is set to the "low probability mode", and the "100 times high support mode" is given.

  When the player wins the "2R time junior high hit", the effect mode from the time of the next fluctuation is set to the "time short effect mode" regardless of the effect mode at the time when the big hit occurs. Further, information indicating the remaining number of times of variation to which the "high support mode" is given is displayed on the display unit 42a.

  Furthermore, when “2R time junior high hit” is won, “high support mode” is given, so “right-handed” in the instruction display area W2 at the time of presentation such as opening presentation and ending presentation, and at the time of fluctuation Is recommended to be displayed. In addition to or instead of the instruction display area W2 immediately before the start of the normal game (for example, ending effect), "right-handed" is performed from the start of the next fluctuation on the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. You may make a recommendation display.

  If you win the winning lottery based on the game ball to the top start winning opening 33A, if you win the "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit", through the reach state, special symbol ZS in the middle symbol display area Is stopped and the symbol of the specified combination is stopped and displayed. After the stop display of the symbol, the opening effect, the jackpot effect and the ending effect are executed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, but the effect mode (when the player wins "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit") The stop symbol, the opening effect, the jackpot effect, the ending effect, and the effect mode from the time of the next change are different depending on the value of “playing state determination Xj”.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72, when “2R normal jackpot” or “small hit” is won when the effect mode is “normal effect mode” or “latent effect effect mode”, as shown in FIG. After passing through the state, the special symbol ZS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 73, “latency-ready opening presentation” is executed on the display unit 42a as the opening presentation. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 74, while the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is performed a predetermined number of times in a relatively short time (up to two times in the present embodiment) As the effect, the “latent correspondence big hit during the effect” is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 51, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is the same at the time of “2R normal big hit” winning and at the time of “small hitting” winning. Then, following the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 75, “latency-ready ending effect” is executed as an ending effect on the display unit 42a.

  Following the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect mode in the display section 42a from the time of the next change is set to the “latency effect mode”. In addition, when winning the “2R normal big hit”, the lottery mode is set to the “low probability mode” and the “low support mode” is given at the time of fluctuation from next time, but the “small hit” If the player is won, the current lottery mode and the support mode are maintained as they are. However, since the "low support mode" is given in the "normal production mode" or the "latency production mode", even if the "small hit" is won, the "2R normal hit" is won Similarly, the support mode from the next change will be the "low support mode". In addition, since the "low support mode" is given, a display is suggested in the instruction display area W2 to recommend "left hit" in the next normal game.

  Furthermore, as described above, the stop symbol, the opening effect, the opening effect, the big hit effect, the ending effect, the variable winning prize when "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" is won in the "normal production mode" or "latency production mode" The opening and closing pattern of the device 32 and the effect mode from the time of the next change are the opening effect etc. when winning in the “2R probability variation jackpot” in the “latency effect mode” of the “normal effect mode” or the “low probability mode”. Is the same as Therefore, when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode", the stop symbol or the variable winning device 32 is selected when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won and when the "2R normal jackpot" or the "small hit" occurs. There is no difference in the opening / closing pattern of, the stage effects (opening presentation, jackpot presentation, and ending presentation), and the presentation mode and support mode after hit. Therefore, the player can not determine based on the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 or the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32 whether the player has won the "2R probability variation big hit" or the "2R normal big hit" or the "small hit". It will be. Therefore, the player can expect the winning of the “2R probability variation jackpot” and eventually the transition to the “high probability mode”, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, when the production mode is the "normal production mode" or the "latency production mode", when it is elected "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit", the stop symbol, hit time The effects are the same, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is the same, and the effect mode and the support mode from the next fluctuation are also the same. Therefore, the player can not distinguish whether "2R normal jackpot" has occurred or "small hit" has occurred based on the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. . Therefore, when the above-described effect or the like corresponding to "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" is made in "latency effect mode" in which "high probability mode" can be set, the player generates "small hit". As a result, it is difficult to determine whether the lottery mode has become the "low probability mode" because the "2R normal jackpot" occurs. Therefore, even if the player is actually in the “low probability mode”, the player can play the game with an expectation that the “high probability mode” is not set.

  It should be noted that, as one of the winning modes, the same effects as those for the "2R probability variation big hit" and the like are performed, while the "2R normal jackpot" in which the lottery mode shifts to the "low probability mode" is provided. The frequency of occurrence of “2R probability variation jackpot” may be increased. More specifically, by providing "2R normal jackpot", even if "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, and even if it becomes "latent production mode" of "high probability mode", at this time "2R normal jackpot" By winning, it is possible to shift (fall) to the “low probability mode”. That is, the presence of the “2R normal jackpot” gives rise to the possibility of transition (falling) to the “low probability mode” in the “latency production mode” of the “high probability mode”. Therefore, in consideration of this possibility, the frequency of occurrence of “2R probability variation jackpot” may be increased. Winning "2R probability variation jackpot" when the same effect corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" and "small hitting" is performed by raising the occurrence frequency of "2R probability variation jackpot" Can be further expected, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

  Returning to the explanation of the opening effect etc. when winning in "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit", when in "time reduction effect mode" or "probable change effect mode", in "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" When the player wins, as shown in FIG. 78, the combination of the prescribed symbols is stopped and displayed, and the "time-shortening opening effect" is performed on the display portion 42a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79, while the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is performed a predetermined number of times in a relatively short time (up to two times in the present embodiment) As a production, "time-saving correspondence big hit middle production" is executed. Furthermore, following this jackpot production, as shown in FIG. 80, “short time ending ending production” is executed as the ending production, and after the ending production (after the end of the jackpot state), as shown in FIG. 81, the next time The effect mode in the display unit 42a from the time of fluctuation of the is set to the "time-saving effect mode". Further, while the lottery mode is set to the “low probability mode” when winning the “2R normal jackpot”, the lottery mode at the current time is maintained as it is when the “small win” is won. Furthermore, as the support mode, "100 times high support mode" is given when "2R normal jackpot" is won, but the current support mode is maintained as it is when "small hit". However, in the normal game after the end of the "small hit", the "high support mode" is obtained based on the information obtained in the sub-control device 262 that represents the total number of times of change since entering the "time-saving effect mode". Dummy information is displayed on the display unit 42a as if it indicates the remaining number of changes to be given. Since this information is displayed in the same manner as the remaining number of times the “high support mode” is provided, which is displayed when the “2R normal jackpot” is won, the player can use this display mode. , It has become impossible to distinguish whether "2R normal jackpot" occurred or "small hit" occurred.

  As described above, since the "high support mode" is provided in the "time reduction effect mode" and the "probability change effect mode", the player can advantageously play the game by performing the "right strike". It is supposed to be. And, as described above, at the time of "right-handed", winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A is hard to occur. Therefore, "2R normal big hit" generated only by winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A is extremely difficult to occur in "time reduction effect mode" or "probability change effect mode", but the occurrence probability is not completely absent . Therefore, in the present embodiment, when winning in "2R normal jackpot" in "time reduction effect mode" or "probability change effect mode", the stop symbol, the effect at the time of hit, the lottery mode or the support mode in the normal game after hit, It is configured to be the same as these when winning the "2R Time Junior High". That is, the winning of the “2R normal jackpot” in the “time-saving effect mode” or the “probable-effect mode” is configured to be treated in the same manner as the winning of the “2R hour-time short jackpot”. Therefore, when "2R normal jackpot" is won in "normal production mode" or "latency production mode", it will be switched to "low support mode", but "high support mode" is given In the case of winning the “2R normal jackpot” in the “time reduction rendering mode” or the “probable variation rendering mode”, the “high support mode” is maintained. As a result, the support mode is not switched to the "low support mode" (the "high support mode" is suddenly discontinued) with the win of the "2R normal jackpot", and a decrease in interest for the player is prevented. Can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is the "probability change effect mode", when the player wins "2R time junior high hit (2R normal big hit)", "small hit" There is no difference in appearance between the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning device 32, the effect at the time of hitting, the effect mode after hitting, the number of times of support, and the player is "2R time jackpot" (2R normal jackpot) It can not be determined whether or not the player has won the “low probability mode” or the “small hit” (the “high probability mode” is maintained).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the "small hit" lottery is performed triggered only by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33A. Then, during the "time-saving mode" to which the "high support mode" is given, or during the "probability change mode", the player usually performs the "right strike", thus becoming a trigger for a "small hit" lottery. It is difficult for a winning to the upper start winning opening 33A to occur. That is, in the present embodiment, the "small hit" does not easily occur in the "time saving mode" or the "probability change mode".

  Now, when "small hit" occurs when the production mode is "probable change production mode" and the production mode becomes "time reduction production mode", return to the "probable change production mode" after a predetermined number of fluctuating display Will occur. That is, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, “return effect” is performed on the display unit 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 after the predetermined number of times of variable display.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, the same character as the character displayed at the time of “16R probability variation jackpot”, that is, the character displayed when giving rise to a more advantageous gaming state for the player appears. As a result, the player has an expectation that something advantageous is brought about. Then, following the display of the character, as shown in FIG. 83, characters and the like which clearly indicate return to the “probable effect production mode” are displayed. As a result, the player feels a happy surprise and a sense of happiness that the above expectation is realized and the user can enter into the "probability change mode" again.

  Then, after the “return effect”, as shown in FIG. 71, the effect mode in the next variable display is set to the “probability change effect mode”. Also, as the support mode, "high support mode until next time" is maintained. In this embodiment, the process of turning on the "return flag", the process of setting the "return counter", and the "return counter" are decremented, and the "return effect command" is set after the specified number of times of variable display. Sub control device that causes "replay effect" to be performed in the decorative symbol display device 42 by controlling the display control device 45 when the function of the main control device 261 that performs the process to perform and the "return effect command" is received An information transmission means is comprised by the function of 262 and the decoration symbol display apparatus 42 in which "return production" is performed.

  In addition, when there is a game ball prize for the variable winning device 32 at the time of winning the "small hit" in the "permanent change effect mode", "return process suggestive effect" is performed that suggests the occurrence of "return effect" . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 84, in the “return process suggestive effect” in the present embodiment, the reach from the beginning of entering into the “time reduction effect mode” after the small hit until the “return effect” is executed The same character as the character displayed at the time of "16R probability variation jackpot" (at the time of causing the player to have an advantageous state of something) except at the time of presentation, etc. Is displayed on the display unit 42a. The "return processing suggestion effect" in which this character is displayed, for the player, reduces the disappointment of "falling to a time saving mode (falling to a disadvantageous state)" and generates an advantageous state. You will get a sense of anticipation as well as a sense of security that the occurrence of an advantageous state is committed. After that, the “return production” is performed, and by returning to the “probable-effect production mode”, the player gets a sense of satisfaction and a great sense of well-being that the expectation held by the player has become a reality.

  As described above in detail, according to the present embodiment, when the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode", when "2R hour short / long jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or "small hit" occurs, The rendering mode from the time of the next fluctuation is configured to be the same (in the present embodiment, both are "time-saving rendering mode").

  Conventionally, when a "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode", the effect mode in the next variable display remains as the "probability change effect mode", or for the player In general, it is a production mode in which a feeling of expectation is held in maintaining the "high probability mode". Therefore, in the normal game after the occurrence of the "small hit", the player considers that the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" as in the case before the occurrence of the "small hit". Therefore, even when the "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode", the player is not given a special feeling of excitement or satisfaction. That is, the player expects the occurrence of the "big hit" in the "probable change production mode" in which the big hit is likely to occur, and in this state, even if the "small hit" occurs, a particularly satisfying feeling is produced. On the contrary, there is a risk of losing interest. In other words, the "small hit" in the conventional "probability change production mode" may not be particularly contributing to the improvement of the playability, or it may be "waste".

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when "2R time junior high jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or "small hit" occurs in the "probable variation production mode", the production mode from the time of the next change is the same It becomes "time saving production mode" of. Here, since the probability of occurrence of the jackpot becomes high in the "probability change production mode" (the lottery mode becomes the "high probability mode"), the player in the "probability change production mode" can usually expect "a lot of balls out" Play games while having the sense of exhilaration and expectation. In particular, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ("16R probability variation jackpot") that is most advantageous to the player in the "probability variation production mode" is apt to occur, so the sense of exhilaration and expectation become very large. On the other hand, the winning of “2R hourly junior high winning” in “probability variation production mode” means a fall from “high probability mode” to “low probability mode”, and “probability variation production mode with the occurrence of“ 2R hourly junior high winning ” In the transition from “time-saving production mode” to the “time-saving production mode”, the above-mentioned uplifting feeling and expectation felt by the player are usually dissipated suddenly, and a great disappointment such as “the high probability mode has ended”. It will be given to the player. In particular, in the present embodiment, the feeling of uplifting and feeling of expectation are likely to be large, so the feeling of disappointment can be very large. In view of this point, in the present embodiment, even if a "small hit" in which the "high probability mode" is maintained occurs, the "2R hour short / short hit" transition to the "low probability mode" ("2R normal Even when the jackpot ") occurs, the effect mode is similarly configured to shift to the" time-saving effect mode ". That is, there is a case where the "high probability mode" is maintained even when a hit occurs in the "probability effect mode" and the "probability effect mode" is shifted to the "time reduction effect mode". Then, for the player, since the same effect mode is given after the hit, "small hit" occurs, and whether "high probability mode" is maintained, "2R hour short jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") It occurs, and it becomes difficult to determine whether the lottery mode has shifted (falled) from the "high probability mode" to the "low probability mode". Therefore, for the player, the feeling of disappointment that the player has shifted to the "low probability mode" is relatively less, and the game is played with the expectation that the "high probability mode" is still maintained. It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest for the player. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest for the player by using the "small hit" which may be "wasted" conventionally.

  In addition, it is executed on the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 when "2R time short jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or "small hit" occurs when the production mode is "probability change production mode". The effect, the number of times of support, the stop symbol at the time of hitting, and the opening pattern of the variable winning device 32 are configured to be the same. Therefore, the player has a "small hit", whether the "high probability mode" is maintained or a "2R hour shorts hit" ("2R normal big hit"), and the lottery mode is the "high probability mode". It becomes even more difficult to determine whether the system has shifted to (low probability mode) or has fallen. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the player.

  Also, conventionally, it is common to separately prepare effects (such as ending effects) to be made when a "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability effect mode", but effect creation Takes time and effort. Here, in order to make the game difficult to get bored and to improve the game characteristics, it is necessary to create and prepare a highly frequent presentation even if it takes labor. In addition, the high-value presentation for the player (for example, although the frequency of occurrence is low, a premium reach presentation that occurs only at the big hit, etc.) stimulates the curiosity of the player and increases the playability. It is necessary to create and prepare even if necessary. However, the rendering with low execution frequency and low value for the player does not contribute so much to the improvement of the playability despite the effort required to create it. That is, when the "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode", the effort to be made is taken into consideration in consideration of the degree of improvement in the game characteristics provided by the effect. Is not desirable.

  Particularly in the present embodiment, the "small hit" lottery is generated only by winning to the upper start entrance 33A, and when the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode", the player usually performs "right-handed" As a result, winning of the upper start winning opening 33A is unlikely to occur. That is, when the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode", the "small hit" hardly occurs. Therefore, even if the effect made when the "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode", the effect is generated only rarely.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, the effect to be made when the "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is "the probability change effect mode" and the "2R time short hit" when the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode" The effects performed when “] etc. are generated are considered to be the same effects (in the present embodiment,“ time-shortening opening effect ”,“ time-shortening big hit medium effect ”, and“ time-shorting corresponding ending effect ”). Therefore, as in the prior art, there is no need to individually prepare the effects to be made when the "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode", and the "smallness" does not contribute so much to the improvement of the gameplay It is possible to avoid the creation of the effect corresponding to the hit. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required for creating effects without causing a decrease in gameplay. In addition, data capacity and processing load can be reduced on the side of main controller 261 and sub controller 262.

  In addition, if the occurrence frequency of the "small hit" in the "probability change production mode" is very low, a hit occurs in the "probability change production mode" and the production mode is changed to the "time reduction production mode". The probability that the lottery mode is switched to the “low probability mode” is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to generate an effect of making it easier for the player to recognize that the lottery mode has shifted from the “high probability mode” to the “low probability mode” (however, in the player, “high probability” There is a considerable expectation that “mode” is continuing.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when "small hit" occurs in the "probable-effect production mode", "return production" is performed, and the "time-saving production mode" is returned to the "probability-change production mode" It is configured. Here, as described above, the transition from the “probability production mode” to the “time reduction production mode” accompanying the hit generation in the “probability production mode” usually causes the player to have a sense of exhilaration and a sense of expectation suddenly And give the player a great feeling of disappointment that "the probability change mode has ended". In the present embodiment, as described above, in order to shift to the "time-saving effect mode" even when the "small hit" in which the "high probability mode" is maintained is made, even when shifting to the "time-shorting effect mode" Although the game is configured to be able to be played with a sense of expectation, for the player who does not know this, the above-mentioned feeling of disappointment will be largely generated. However, in the present embodiment, the "return effect" is performed in a state where the player has such a large feeling of disappointment, and the "time reduction effect mode" is returned to the "probability change effect mode". As a result, the player's mood rises from a state of being disappointed (indented) to a state of happiness all at once, which can give the player a very great feeling of joy and excitement. This makes it possible to dramatically improve the interest for the player. Incidentally, even in the case of transition to the “time reduction effect mode”, it is possible for the player who knows that the “high probability mode” can be maintained to feel a sufficiently great sense of satisfaction and excitement. That is, if transitioning to the "time-saving effect mode", the player feels anxious feeling that "it may not have shifted to the low probability mode" to some extent, but the "return effect" is generated, as described above. Anxiety is wiped away, and the player can obtain a great sense of satisfaction and exhilaration that the high probability mode has been maintained.

  Furthermore, by providing "2R normal jackpot" to shift (fall) to "low probability mode" as a hit type, it is possible to further increase the occurrence ratio of "2R probability variation jackpot" to shift to "high probability mode" . As a result, the "high probability mode" is more easily given when a jackpot occurs, and the interest for the player can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “return process suggestion effect” is executable in the decorative symbol display device 42. Therefore, the player has a feeling of disappointment and anxiety by having shifted to the "time-saving effect mode" with the hit in the "probable-effect mode", but by performing the "return process suggestive effect", A player who does not know the "return production" is reduced in the feeling of disappointment and insecurity, and has a great expectation that something of an advantageous state may occur. In this state, the “return effect” is performed, and by returning to the “probability change effect mode”, the player can obtain a great satisfaction that “the sense of expectation of oneself has become a real thing”. As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved. In addition, the player who knows the "return production" can grasp returning to the "probable-effect production mode" before the execution of the "return production", and the "high probability mode" is maintained (again, "high The sense of security can be obtained earlier. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest for the player. In particular, in the present embodiment, the “return processing suggestion effect” is performed from the beginning when the “time reduction effect mode” is entered, so that the player will soon feel hopeful and secure with disappointment. Therefore, even if the decline in interest caused by disappointment occurs, it can be resolved immediately, and as a result, the interest can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the “return process suggestion effect” is configured to be executed by winning the gaming ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hitting state. Therefore, the winning of the gaming ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hitting state not only benefits the gaming ball but also provides the player with a benefit such as the execution decision of "return processing suggestion effect" after the small hitting. Interest can be further improved. In addition, for the player, even if a hit occurs such that the effect mode shifts from the “probable change effect mode” to the “time reduction effect mode” (even if the combination of the specified symbols is stopped and displayed), in the hit state If it is possible to win a game ball on the variable winning device 32, it appears that it is possible to cause the execution of "return process suggestion effect" and, eventually, return to the "probability effect mode". Therefore, it becomes possible to play a game in which the game ball is positively aimed at winning the game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the hit state, and the interest can be further improved.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) The configuration related to the upper start winning opening 33A and the lower start winning opening 33B is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the "small hit" is generated only when the gaming ball has won the upper starting winning opening 33A, but the present invention is not limited to this, the gaming ball is winning to the lower starting winning opening 33B Even in the case where it does, it makes it the constitution where “small hitting” may occur, it is possible to constitute so that “small hitting” is easy to occur. By configuring the "small hit" to occur also when the game ball for the lower start winning opening 33B is also generated, the player is "2R time junior high jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or "in the probability change effect mode" or " When a "small hit" occurs and the rendering mode is changed to the "time-saving rendering mode", it becomes easier to have an expectation that the "high probability mode" is still maintained. As a result, it is possible to make the game hard to get bored and to improve the interest for the player.

  Further, the winning probability of "small hit" may be different between when the gaming ball has won the upper start winning opening 33A and when the gaming ball has won the lower starting winning opening 33B. For example, the winning probability of "small hit" when the gaming ball has won to the lower start winning opening 33B is higher than the winning probability of "small hitting" when the gaming ball has won to the upper starting winning opening 33A It may be In this case, a "2R time junior high jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or a "small hit" occurs in the "probable change production mode" in which the gaming ball is likely to win the lower start winning opening 33B When transitioning to the production mode, the probability that this transition is due to "small hit" increases. Therefore, the player can further expect maintenance of the "high probability mode", and can further improve the interest.

  Further, as described above, for example, when the winning probability of "small hit" is configured to be larger by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B than by the winning of the upper starting winning opening 33A, for example, As shown in 85, two starting winning openings (upper starting winning opening 33A and lower starting winning opening 33B) are vertically juxtaposed, and the number of pending game balls for the upper starting winning opening 33A is the maximum number When it became, the game ball which passed between the two nails (so-called life nails) located immediately above the upper start winning opening 33A is not the upper starting winning opening 33A, but the lower starting lower winning opening 33B below it. (See, for example, an example described later). As a result, even in the "low support mode" in which the gaming ball is difficult to normally win the upper starting winning opening 33B, the gaming ball is more likely to win the lower starting winning opening 33B, and thus "small hit" is more It tends to occur. Therefore, since the effect mode is easily shifted to the “latency effect mode”, the game is less likely to get bored, and the interest for the player can be improved. In addition, the player can obtain more chances of the success or failure lottery, and can improve the interest. On the other hand, the game ball for the lower start winning opening 33B described above is located when the number of holdings due to the game ball for the upper start winning opening 33A is the largest and immediately above the upper start winning hole 33A Since the game ball is generated only when the game ball passes through the two nails, the player can not obtain too many chances for the winning lottery, and the disadvantage on the hall side becomes sufficiently small.

  In addition, as a composition by which the game ball which passed between two nails located immediately above the upper start winning opening 33A is guided to the lower starting winning opening 33B, for example, the following configuration can be mentioned. That is, as shown in FIG. 85, the upper starting winning opening 33A (the hole formed in the game board) extends forward from the lower starting side of the upper starting winning opening 33A (a hole formed in the game board) and passes the two nails. A guide member 37b (a portion shown by a dotted line in FIG. 85) which can be guided to a hole formed in the game board can be made to appear on and exit from the game board. Then, when the number of reservations due to the game ball winning on the upper start winning opening 33A is maximum, the guide member 37b is sunk, so that the game ball having passed through the two nails has sunk the portion of the guide member 37b. It passes through, and passes between the electrically-powered prizes 37, and it is the structure etc. which enable it to be able to win to the lower start winning a prize mouth 33B. In addition, during a period in which the gaming ball having passed between the two nails can be guided to the lower starting winning opening 33B, from when one gaming ball is fired until the gaming ball reaches the upper starting winning opening 33A It may be similar to the average time required to In this case, when the number of reservations by the game ball for the upper start winning opening 33A is maximized and the player stops the game ball from firing (the number of reservations by the game ball for the upper startup winning opening 33A is At the maximum, even if a game ball is won in the upper start winning opening 33A, the player often stops the firing of the game ball because the lottery opportunity is not obtained, and the game ball fired just before the stop is also It is possible to win the lower start winning entry 33B. That is, even if the player has won the upper start winning opening 33A, it is possible to obtain the lottery opportunity by the game ball which could not obtain the lottery opportunity, and for the player, the balls are not wasted. Can be suppressed. Also, as in the above embodiment, the jackpot awarded by the game ball winning to the lower start winning opening 33B is more advantageous than the jackpot awarded by the game ball winning to the upper starting prize opening 33A (e.g. If the expected value of the game ball that can be acquired in the state is larger), the player actively fires the game ball even after the number of pending game ball winnings for the upper start winning opening 33A is maximum, It is possible to play games such as aiming for the generation of an advantageous jackpot, and as a result, it is possible to further enhance the gameplay.

  Further, in the above embodiment, both the variable display triggered by the game ball winning in the upper start winning opening 33A and the variable display triggered by the game ball winning in the lower start winning opening 33B are suspended. In the case where there is a lower starting winning opening 33B, the variable display triggered by the winning of the gaming ball is given priority, and the suspension is absorbed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the upper starting The variation display may be digested according to the winning sequence of the gaming balls to the winning opening 33A and the lower start winning opening 33B.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although two starting winning openings (upper starting winning opening 33A and lower starting winning opening 33B) are arranged side by side vertically, for example, the starting winning opening is not limited thereto. One may be provided, or three or more may be provided. Also, two start winning openings may be arranged side by side. The lower start winning opening 33B may be disposed in the right side area of the variable display unit 35.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the number of winning balls is, for example, three in the case where the game balls have been won in the start winning openings 33A, 33B, and in the case where the game balls in the variable winning device 32 have been won. The number of winning balls for each winning opening is not limited to 15 although it is set to 15 or the like.

  In the above-described embodiment, the distribution of jackpot types to be awarded when winning in the winning lottery is different depending on whether the gaming ball has won the upper starting winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B. It is set. Not limited to this, in the case where the game ball has won in the upper start winning opening 33A and in the case where the lower starting winning opening 33B has won, the jackpot type given in the case of winning in the lottery will be the same. It may be configured.

  In the above embodiment, an open lottery as to whether or not the electric combination 37 (lower start winning opening 33B) is opened due to the game ball passing through the through gate 34 is performed, and the open lottery is performed. When the player wins the game, the motorized role piece 37 is in the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the “low support mode”, even when the game ball passes the through gate 34 When the game ball passes the through gate 34 during the "high support mode", the electric character 37 always opens without performing the opening lottery. It may be a configuration.

  In the above embodiment, the motorized jack 37 is configured to be displaceable between the non-winning closed state of the gaming ball and the open state where the gaming ball can be won, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The object 37 can be displaced between the difficult-to-win closed state of the game ball and the easily-opened open state of the game ball, and even in the closed state, the game ball can win the lower starting winning opening 33B. It may be

  The type, content, and the like of (b) are not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the support mode given after the big hit is different depending on the big hit type, but not limited to this, for example, the configuration in which the "high support mode" is always given regardless of the big hit type It may be

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the player wins the “2R normal jackpot” in the “probability change production mode” or the “time reduction production mode”, the “100 times high support mode” is selected as in the case of winning the “2R time junior high hit”. It is configured to be granted, but it is the same as the case of winning "2R normal jackpot" in the other production modes, when "2R normal jackpot" is won in "time change effect mode" or "time reduction effect mode". It may be configured to be switched to the “low support mode” and not to be provided with the “high support mode”. With this configuration, processing for changing the support mode to be provided based on the difference in the rendering mode is unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, this configuration is, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-18 of the jackpot end setting process (that is, when “2R normal jackpot” is won), By setting so as to shift to step S206-9-11-25 without going through the process (process of step S206-9-11-24 in FIG. 29) for determining the current “game state determination value Xj” realizable.

  In the above embodiment, after various jackpots have been performed, the "high support mode" is provided while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the variable display a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot state occurs. However, the duration of the "high support mode" is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the duration of the "high support mode" may be different depending on the jackpot type.

  In the above embodiment, when “short opening” of the variable winning device 32 is performed a plurality of times (twice) such as “2R normal big hit” or “2R hourly short winning”, one of the “short opening” is performed. When there are three game ball wins on the variable winning device 32, the "short opening" is ended, but not limited to this, for example, variable in two "short opening" The jackpot state may end when the total of the number of gaming balls that have won in the winning device 32 is ten.

  In the above embodiment, if the maximum number of predetermined winnings (defined number K1) to the variable winning device 32 per one opening and closing operation (one special award state) of the opening and closing plate 32b is "long open", "10 If it is "short open", it is set to "three". The present invention is not limited to this, and another number may be set as the maximum expected number of winnings. In addition, the maximum number of scheduled winnings for both "long opening" and "short opening" is set to, for example, "8", etc., etc. open type (difference in operation mode of opening / closing member according to one opening / closing operation) However, the maximum number of expected winnings may be set to the same number.

  In the above embodiment, the lottery mode is set to the "high probability mode" and the "high support mode until the next time" is given when the "8R probability variation jackpot" or the "16R probability variation jackpot" is won. However, the “high support mode” may not necessarily be provided until the next time, for example, the “high support mode” is provided only while the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times). It is also good. Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, the number of times of variation given to the “high support mode” may be configured to be different. Further, the lottery mode may be configured to be changed to the “low probability mode” when the provision period of the “high support mode” is ended, or the “high probability mode” is maintained as it is. You may

  (C) The open mode (opening / closing pattern) of the variable winning device 32 is not limited to the above embodiment.

  For example, one open mode (open time) of the opening and closing plate 32b is not limited to the two types of "long open" and "short open" in the above embodiment. For example, it is good also as composition provided with three or more kinds of opening modes, such as providing "inside opening" whose opening time is shorter than "long opening" and opening time longer than "short opening".

  In the above embodiment, the open time (specified time) of the “short open” is set to “0.4 seconds”, which is shorter than the firing cycle “0.6 second” of the launcher 60, but “short open” Is not limited to this, and may be set, for example, to a time longer than the firing cycle "0.6 seconds" of the launcher 60. However, since the number of winnings becomes too large if it becomes too long, it is preferable to set to about 1.8 seconds or less, which is about three times the firing cycle "0.6 seconds".

  Further, the number of times of execution of "short open" at the time of occurrence of "2R normal jackpot", "2R hourly junior high hit" or the like is not limited to "twice" in the above embodiment. For example, a relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds) "short open" may be performed only once. Furthermore, in the small hit state, the maximum number M1 of the game balls that can be awarded to the variable winning device 32 may be changed variously. In general, in the small hitting state, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 32 is 1.8 seconds or less in total, and the maximum winning possible number M1 of the variable winning devices 32 is 10 in total.

  In addition, if the player wins the "small hit" in the "probable change production mode", the opening time is made relatively longer or the number of opens is relatively larger than when the "small hit" is won in the other production modes. The game ball may be configured to easily win the variable winning device 32 by doing or the like. In this case, the “return process suggestion effect” by the game ball to the variable winning device 32 can be more easily performed, and the player can more easily obtain a sense of security of returning to the “probable change effect mode”.

  Furthermore, the configuration of the variable winning device 32 is not limited to that of the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the configuration of the displacement member in the variable winning device 32 so that the game ball can easily win the variable winning device 32 when the opening time of the variable winning device 32 is relatively short, such as when winning a "small hit". May be changed variously. For example, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (c), a plate-like member 32c may be used as the displacing member, which can be inserted into and withdrawn from the game area and has an upper surface inclined. In this case, not only the gaming balls that reach the variable winning device 32 at the moment when the variable winning device 32 is open, but also when the variable winning device 32 is opened (when the plate-like member 32c is sunk) The game ball on the upper surface of the ring-shaped member 32c can also be made to be awarded to the variable winning device 32, and the interest for the player can be improved. Further, when using such a plate-like member 32c, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) to (c), a protrusion 32d which can be inserted into or withdrawn from the game area directly above the upper surface of the plate-like member 32c. You may provide. And, normally, while the projection 32d is in a sinking state, the projection 32d together with the plate-like member 32c can be made to appear and retract only when the "small hit" is won in the "probability change effect mode". It becomes easier for the game ball to ride on the upper surface of the plate-like member 32c for a longer time, and the game ball can be made easier to win the variable winning device 32. As a result, the “return processing suggestion effect” resulting from the game ball winning to the variable winning device 32 is more likely to occur, and the interest for the player can be further enhanced. In addition, in order to exert the above-mentioned effect more reliably, the projection 32d may be provided on the downstream side of the center of the plate 32c in the width direction along the flow direction of the gaming ball on the upper surface of the plate 32c. preferable.

  Of course, the configuration of "long opening" is not limited to the above embodiment as well as the case of "short opening", and various configurations different from the above embodiment are adopted regarding opening time, winning number, etc. can do.

  Further, in the above embodiment, during the opening effect in the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, the opening process of the variable winning device 32 (opening and closing plate 32b) stands by, and the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 32 is performed after the opening effect. However, the opening and closing start timing of the variable winning device 32 is not particularly limited. Therefore, for example, the opening effect is omitted, and the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 32 is started in the jackpot effect (small hitting and middle effect) following the fluctuation stop, that is, the standby of the opening and closing process in the variable winning device 32 is particularly executed It may be configured not to

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the "opening number counter" is provided to measure the opening / closing number of the variable winning device 32 (opening / closing plate 32b) in the hit state, but the "opening number counter" may be omitted. In this case, the lower byte in the “xx round open command” or the “xx round close command” may be configured, for example, by the value of the “remaining open number counter”.

  (D) In the above embodiment, the open pattern at the time of occurrence of "small hit", the open pattern at the time of occurrence of "2R probability variation big hit", the open pattern at the time of occurrence of "2R hourly short hit", and "2R normal jackpot" Although the open pattern at the time of occurrence of “” is the same open pattern, the open modes may be different. However, in terms of increasing the degree of expectation for maintaining the “2R probability variation big hit” (transition to the “high probability mode”) or maintaining the “high probability mode”, the interest for the player can be more effectively improved. It is preferable to set it as the open pattern in which it is hard to distinguish between "2R hour and time large jackpot", "2R probability variation big hit", "2R normal big hit" and "small hit".

  (E) The configuration of the game board 30 on the board is not limited to the above embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, the through gate 34 and the variable winning device 32 are disposed in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position where the game ball which has flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 can not reach). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the through gate 34 may be disposed in the left side area of the variable display unit 35, or the variable prize device 32 may be disposed below the start winning openings 33A and 33B. It may be

  Further, in the above embodiment, the upper start winning opening 33A is disposed at a position where the game ball which has flowed down the right side area of the variable display unit 35 can not reach, but flows down the right side area of the variable display unit 35. The upper start winning opening 33A may be disposed at a position where the game ball can reach. Furthermore, the lower start winning opening 33B may be disposed at a position where the gaming ball having flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 can not reach.

  The through gate 34 is disposed only in the left side area of the variable display unit 35, and both start winning openings 33A, 33B and the variable winning device 32 are disposed at positions reachable by the game balls passing through the left side area. In this case, the player can advantageously advance the game by performing "left strike" in either the "low support mode" or the "high support mode". Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to provide the indication display area W2 in the decorative symbol display device 42, and it is not necessary to indicate to the player the recommended firing direction of the gaming ball.

  Further, in the configuration in which the through gate 34 and the start winning openings 33A, 33B, etc. are arranged as described above, even in the "high support mode", the game ball easily wins the upper starting winning opening 33A. Therefore, in the configuration in which the "small hit" occurs due to only the winning of the gaming ball to the upper start winning opening 33A as in the above embodiment, the "small hit" is more likely to occur. That is, even if one of "2R time shorts big hit" ("2R normal big hit") and "small hit" occurs in "the probability variation production mode" and this transition to "time saving effect mode", this transition is "small hit" The probability that has arisen due to Therefore, when the player shifts to the “time reduction rendering mode”, the player is more likely to have an expectation that the “high probability mode” is still maintained. As a result, it is possible to make the game hard to get bored, and to improve the interest for the player.

  (F) The configurations of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b may be provided at a position such as the upper corner of the game area, such as a position other than the lower corner of the game area. Further, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided at positions easy for the player to visually recognize, and the display portion is made relatively large, and the time for which the discrimination character is stopped and displayed is relatively long You may

  (G) The display effect, the display mode, and the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 are not limited to the above embodiment.

  For example, when jackpot information or small hit information is stored in any of the reserve areas of the sub variation reserve area, for example, by making reserve images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 images of a mode different from the normal mode The player may be notified or suggested that a jackpot or a jackpot will occur. In addition, it is good also as composition which performs notification of a big hit or a small hit, etc., only when predetermined conditions are satisfied, such as a case of winning a lottery whether or not to give a big hit or a small hit.

  Further, for example, the notification color or the small hit may be notified or suggested by changing or blinking the lighting color of the holding lamps 46a and 46b. Further, the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to perform, for example, an explicit display indicating the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit, or a suggestive display such as "indecent gout". Further, in addition to or instead of the notification or suggestion of the jackpot or the small hit in the decorative symbol display device 42, the speaker SP may be used to carry out notification or suggestion by voice or the like, or notification by the light emission mode of various lamps It may be configured to make a suggestion.

  In addition, regardless of the case where the big hit information and the small hit information are stored in the reserve area, the effect lottery is separately performed, and the notification or suggestion of the pseudo big hit or the small hit is performed based on the lottery result. It is also good. By combining this configuration with the configuration of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect of disguising a jackpot or a small jackpot, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  (H) The command transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262 or the like is not limited to the above exemplified command.

  For example, the "ending command" is configured to include "gaming state determination value Xj", and the sub control device 262 that receives the "ending command" is based on "gaming state determination value Xj" included in the received "ending command". The effect mode in the display unit 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be changed to the display control device 45.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the “variation pattern command” and the “symbol command” are output from the main control device 261 at the start of the variation display, and the “variation pattern command” plays the role of the variation start command. Therefore, the information corresponding to the "variation pattern command" and the "symbol command" is directly written to the sub execution area. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, a configuration in which these commands are output in advance together with the hold control command etc. and stored in advance in a predetermined hold area of the sub change hold area, and a change start command is separately output at the start of change display. It may be

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the confirmation command for performing stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not output to the sub control device 262, the confirmation command may be output. In this way, synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be achieved more reliably. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub control device 262 by the “pattern command” and the “variation pattern command” output at the start of the variable display, the decorative symbol display device 42 is again It is not necessary to add information on the stop mode of

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the "game state determination value Xj" is included in the "return command" and the "variation pattern command". However, the present invention is not limited to this. "Xj" may be included. In the configuration in which a command (determination command) or the like for determining the suspension at the time of the variable stop is output, the configuration command may include the “playing state determination value Xj”.

  (I) The configuration of various tables such as the fluctuation pattern table is not limited to the above embodiment.

  (J) A pachinko machine of a type different from that of the above embodiment may be implemented. For example, the pachinko machine is implemented as a pachinko machine in which switching is not performed in the prize support mode ("high support mode" or "low support mode"), and only in the lottery mode ("high probability mode" or "low probability mode"). It is also good. In addition, instead of or in addition to the payout of the winning balls, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured to provide points corresponding to the winning balls obtained by the player to a storage medium such as a magnetic card.

  In addition to pachinko machines, it is also possible to implement various game machines such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, and gaming machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused. In the slot machine, for example, the symbols are changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbols are determined and stopped by operating the stop button. It is a thing. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a variable display means is provided for variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols, and a handle for game ball launch The thing which is not equipped is mentioned. In this case, after the predetermined amount of game balls are inserted based on the predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the jackpot condition advantageous to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the final symbol at the time of the stop is the so-called jackpot symbol, and the player receives the lower tray. A large amount of gaming balls are paid out.

  (K) The configuration regarding "small hit" is not limited to the above embodiment.

  For example, as in the "big hit", a plurality of "small hits" may be provided. In addition, the variation pattern table selected in the display control process according to the subsequent variation display may be configured differently depending on the winning small hit type.

  Here, for example, the reach effect tends to occur, or the fluctuation time per one time becomes longer, and the number of times of fluctuation display execution per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) becomes smaller. A variation pattern table can be selected. When such a fluctuation pattern table is selected, for example, a lot of reach effects are executed, or one fluctuation time is lengthened, or the like, so that the player may feel that the "latency mode" may be made. By enhancing the player's expectation regarding the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

  Conversely, for example, the reach effect is less likely to occur, or the fluctuation time per one time is shortened, and the number of times of fluctuation display execution per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is further increased. A variation pattern table can be selected. When the "small hit" occurs, the variable display is stopped, and accordingly, the number of times of the variable display execution per unit time is reduced. On the other hand, if the variation pattern table is selected after completion of the "small hit", the time required to execute the variable display a predetermined number of times is longer than when "small hit" does not occur. In addition, it is possible to recover the loss of time caused by the occurrence of "small hit".

  In addition, with the occurrence of the “small hit” as a trigger, the winning probability of the “small hit” may be changed.

  In the above embodiment, when "small hit", a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42, or a combination of prescribed symbols is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 42. The stop display is configured, but the stop symbol at the time of the "small hit" is not limited to this. For example, when a "small hit" occurs, a special symbol may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area or a combination of defined symbols may be displayed.

  In addition, the combination of the prescribed symbols in the above embodiment is an example, and the symbols displayed as the combination of the prescribed symbols can be changed as appropriate.

  (L) In the above embodiment, the information transmitting means is configured by the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like that performs “return effect”, but the information transmitting means may be configured by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 42 . For example, the speaker SP notifying or suggesting a return to the "probable change mode" by voice or the like, or various lamps notifying or suggesting a return to the "probable change mode" by light emission may constitute the information transmitting means. .

  (M) In the above embodiment, “normal effect mode”, “time reduction effect mode”, “latency effect mode” and “probable change effect mode” are provided as the effect mode, but each effect mode includes a plurality of effects A mode may be provided. For example, a plurality of effect modes may be provided as the "time-saving effect mode", or a plurality of effect modes may be provided as the "latency effect mode". In the case where a plurality of effect modes are provided in the “time reduction effect mode”, when “small hit” occurs in the “probability change effect mode”, a specific effect mode of the plurality of effect modes is “probability change”. It may be configured to be easier to select than when "2R hour shorts hit" or the like occurs in the effect mode ".

  (N) The effect to be performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 in the hit state, such as the "opening effect" in the above embodiment is an example, and the effect to be performed is not particularly limited. Further, for example, as for the “opening effect”, a predetermined effect may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as in the above embodiment, or according to the display on the decorative symbol display device 42, A predetermined sound effect may be sounded, a predetermined accessory, a lamp, an LED or the like may be activated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the player is elected as "2R time junior high winning" ("2R normal big hit") or "small hit" in the "probable variation production mode", the presentation mode from the time of the next change is configured to be the same. It is done. However, the rendering mode from the time of the next fluctuation when "2R time junior high winning" is won and the rendering mode from the time of the next fluctuation when "small hitting" is elected may not be exactly the same. As long as the player does not watch or listen carefully, it may be similar to or confusing to the same degree. For example, a part of the display image (for example, a display or a color) may be slightly different (may be always different, may be different only at the time of change, or may be different only at the time of change) If the difference between the generation timing of the sound effects and the operation timing of characters and the like is recognized as the same effect mode unless the player is particularly aware, the effect mode may be slightly different in both effect modes. There may be differences.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as the effects performed in the hit state, "opening effect", "big hit effect" ("small hit effect") and "ending effect" are mentioned, but all these effects are necessarily performed There is no need. For example, only the “opening effect” and the “ending effect” may be provided, and the “opening effect” may include the “big hit effect” (“small hit effect)”. Note that this configuration can be realized, for example, by setting the sub control device 262 so as to perform the "opening effect" between the reception of the "opening command" and the reception of the "ending command".

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the sub controller 262 receives the “xx round open command” and the “xx round close command”, an effect during opening and an effect during closing are alternately performed in the decorative symbol display device 42. As a result, although the jackpot effect is made in the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, the reception of the "xx round open command" does not depend on the presence or absence of the "xx round close command". Until the “xx round open command” is received, an effect in which the open effect and the closed effect are continuous may be performed (xx round effect). Also, when the jackpot effect is relatively short, such as “2R probability variation jackpot” or “2R normal jackpot”, “xx round opening command” or “xx round closing command” is received by receiving “one round opening command”. During the period until the “ending command” is received, the jackpot effect may be continuously performed without depending on “or”.

  Moreover, you may comprise similarly to the above also regarding execution of a "small hit middle production". For example, with the reception of the "xx open command", the open stage production and the closed stage production are continued until the next "xx open command" is received regardless of the presence or absence of the "xx close command". It may be configured such that the rendered effect (xx open-eye effect) is performed. In addition, by receiving the "1st open command", small hit and middle effects are continued until the "ending command" is received, regardless of the presence or absence of other "xx open command" and "xx close command". May be configured to

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, when winning "8R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot", different in-opening effects are performed in each round, but opening in some of each round A common effect may be performed as the middle effect, or a common open effect may be performed in all the rounds. In this case, it is possible to reduce the effort of creating effects and to reduce the data capacity.

  (O) In the above embodiment, if one or more gaming balls win in the variable winning device 32 in the small hitting state, "return processing suggestion effect" is executed, but "return processing suggestion" The number of winnings of the game ball for which the effect can be executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, a lottery may be made when the "small hit" is won, and the number of winnings of the game ball for which the "return process suggestion effect" can be performed may be set each time the "small hit". The number of winnings to be set may be 0 (in other words, as a result of the lottery, even if there is no winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32, "return process suggestion effect" is set to be executed May).

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, "return process suggestion effect" is configured to be executable when the game ball is awarded to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state, but "return process suggestion effect" The execution conditions of are not limited to this. For example, regardless of the presence or absence of a game ball on the variable winning device 32, "return process suggestion effect" is always performed [for example, the process of step S206-14-5-5 (see FIG. 33) is omitted, " It may be configured that "return processing suggestion command" is always set.

  Further, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the presence or absence of the game ball's winning on the variable winning device 32, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, "return process suggestion effect" is performed (for example, FIG. As shown in the flowchart, only when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the process of step S206-14-5-A, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-6, and the “return process suggestion command” is set). You may Furthermore, the above-mentioned predetermined condition is checked only when the game ball has won the variable winning device 32 in the "small hit" state, and "return process suggestion effect" is performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, when one of the game ball winning to the variable winning device 32 in the small hitting state and the one satisfying the predetermined condition are satisfied, “return process suggestion effect” is performed. It may be configured. As the predetermined condition, for example, whether the predetermined counter value (the value of the random number counter C1 or the like) is equal to the predetermined value set in advance, the counter value becomes larger or smaller than the predetermined value. What can be determined whether or not etc. can be mentioned.

  In addition, depending on the gaming state (for example, the number of times the jackpot has been played or the number of jackpots ("8R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot") or the number of times the "small hit" has been won, etc.) The condition for executing the effect may be changed. In this case, the generation condition of the "return process suggestion effect" becomes more random, and the interest for the player can be improved.

  Further, the aspect of “return processing suggestion effect” in the above embodiment is an example, and the aspect of “return processing suggestion effect” is not limited to that of the above embodiment. As "return process suggestion effect", for example, between "small hit" and "return effect", the utility works at the timing at which normally does not operate, a predetermined sound is emitted from the speaker SP, a lamp or the like An effect may be performed such that the operation mode of the light emitting means such as the LED is different from that in the normal state.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern table (special small) is different from the fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the player wins the "small hit" in the "probability change production mode" and is selected when the "small hit" is won in the other production modes. By preparing a variation pattern table for winning, and selecting the variation pattern table for special small hitting from the change to the "time reduction effect mode" to the time when the "return effect" is performed, the "return process" You may comprise so that "suggestion effects" may be made. For example, in the variation pattern table for special small hits, variation per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), such as reach effect tends to occur, or one variation time becomes long. It may be a fluctuation pattern table in which the number of display executions is reduced. It is possible to suggest the occurrence of a "return effect" to the player by changing the variation mode such as reach is likely to occur, and the "probability change effect mode" in the player. It is possible to increase the expectation of return to

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although "return processing suggestion production" is executed from the beginning of entering into "time reduction production mode" after small hit, the execution timing of "return production" can be changed suitably It is. For example, in the “ending effect” after the small hitting, “return process suggestion effect” may be performed, such as displaying a character not displayed in the normal “ending effect”. Further, in the small hit middle effect, a “return process suggestion effect” may be performed such as displaying a character not displayed in the normal “small hit middle effect”. It should be noted that when performing "return process suggestion effect" in "small hitting middle effect", since "return process suggestion command" based on the game ball to the variable winning device 32 can not be set, "return process suggestion" For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the "first open command" is set in the small winning special prize state start processing (S206-13-A: YES), the effect mode at the current time is "a certainty effect "Mode" (that is, "playing state determination value xj" is "4") and a predetermined condition is satisfied in a lottery or the like (S206-13-B: YES, S206-13-C: YES) The "return process suggestion command" may be set in step S206-13-D.

  Further, for example, the main control device 261 is configured to transmit information (execution value of “return counter”) regarding the execution timing of “return effect” to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 is transmitted. Based on the information, the “return process suggestion such as displaying a predetermined character on the display unit 42 a or the like until the“ return effect ”is performed after the change count until the“ return effect ”is performed becomes a predetermined number You may comprise so that "effect" may be performed.

  In addition, for example, from the beginning of the "time reduction effect mode" after a small hit, or after a predetermined number of fluctuation display is performed after the "time reduction effect mode" is set, until the "return effect" is performed A predetermined character is displayed only at a predetermined change (for example, when the number of changes until “return effect” reaches a predetermined number) in the interval (for example, the character is displayed at a change) However, the "return process suggestion effect" may be executed when the character is not displayed or the like at other times of change.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 to FIG. 94, an effect (“return process lottery effect”) to enliven the player's interest is performed by lottery to determine whether the above “return process” is performed or not. May be When the lottery is won in the "return process lottery effect", as shown in FIG. 83, the "return effect" is explicitly indicated in the decorative symbol display device 42 to shift to the "probability change effect mode". In FIG. 91, on the display unit 42a, a needle rotating about an approximate center of the display unit 42a and a display region divided as a success region and a failure region along the rotation direction are displayed. The drawing shows a "return process lottery effect" in which the lottery is won when the needle is stopped in the success area and the lottery is not won when the needle is stopped in the failure area. Further, FIG. 92 shows an example of effects when performing a lottery, FIG. 93 shows an example of effects when winning in the lottery in FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is not elected in the lottery in FIG. It shows an example of the effect in the case.

  In addition, also in the "time reduction effect mode" of the "low probability mode", that is, in the "probability change effect mode" "2R time shorts hit" ("2R normal jackpot"), also in the decorative symbol display device 42 "return In this case, the player may be in the “high probability mode” or the “low probability mode” depending on the presence or absence of the “return process lottery effect” (“return effect”) Can be distinguished, and maintenance of the "high probability mode" can be expected, so that the interest can be improved.

  The “return process lottery effect” can be executed, for example, as follows. More specifically, when "return process lottery effect" is executed in main controller 261, first, as shown in FIG. 95, when "2R time junior high hit" is won in "probability change effect mode" (step S206-9- 11-A: "Return counter" is set to "YES" (step S206-9-11-B), and "false return flag" is set to ON (step S206-9-11-C) ) To do. The “false return flag” is state determination information used when determining whether or not to execute the return process (S205-16-8) in FIG. 96 described next. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 96, when the “return flag” or the “false return flag” is on in step S205-16-7 of the variation end time setting process, the return process (S205-16-8) is performed. Configure to be run. In addition, as shown in FIG. 97, when the "return counter" becomes "0" in the return process, the "return process" is performed in step S205-16-8-B or step S205-16-8-D. A command ("return process lottery effect command") for executing the lottery effect is set. More specifically, the "return process lottery effect command" includes information on the lottery result, and when the "return flag" is on (S205-16-8-A: YES), the lottery result is won. A "return process lottery effect command" (success command) including the information to be set is set (S205-16-8-B). On the other hand, if the "false return flag" is on (S205-16-8-A: NO, S205-16-8-C: YES), the information including the lottery result as non-winning is included. A return processing lottery effect command "(failure command) is set (S205-16-8-D). Furthermore, if the "return flag" is on (S205-16-8-A: YES), the setting of the "return processing lottery effect command", the setting of the "return effect command", or the "gaming state determination value Xj" (S205-16-8-3 to 6) is executed while the false return flag is on (S205). In 16-8-C: YES, these processes are not performed, and only the off process (S205-16-8-E) of the "false return flag" is performed. When the "small hit" or the "2R time junior high hit" ("2R normal jackpot") occurs in the "probability change effect mode", the "return process lottery effect" can be executed.

  In addition, by performing main processing in the sub control device 262, "return processing lottery effect" may be executed. Specifically, it is configured such that information on ON / OFF of the “return flag” and “false return flag” and information on the value of “return counter” are input from the main controller 261 to the sub controller 262. Keep it. Then, when the "return flag" or "false return flag" is on, when the value of the input "return counter" becomes "0", the "return process lottery effect command" is set. At the same time, the set command is output to the display control device 45, and the "return processing lottery effect" is executed on the display unit 42a. Incidentally, in setting the "return process lottery effect command", the sub control device 262 sets the "return process lottery effect command" including the information that the lottery result is won when the "return flag" is on. When the display control device 45 receives this command, the display control device 45 displays that the lottery has been won. On the other hand, when the "fake return flag" is on, the sub-control device 262 sets a "return process lottery effect command" including information that the lottery result is not won, and the display control receives this command. The device 45 provides a display indicating that the lottery has not been won. Note that the processing load on the main control device 261 can be reduced by the sub control device 262 performing the main processing of “return process lottery effect”.

  Furthermore, the “return process lottery effect” may be performed a plurality of times. In this case, it is possible to further improve the interest for the player. In addition, in the state of "return flag" being on, when performing "return process lottery effect" multiple times, while the lottery result will be won in the last "return process lottery effect" just before "return effect", In the previous "return process lottery effect", the winning result is configured to be non-winning. In addition, when the “fake return flag” is on, it is configured such that the winning result in the “return processing lottery effect” is always a non-win.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, a button display BO indicating that pressing of the effect button is possible during the lottery effect is displayed on the display section 42a, and the player operates the effect button 125. By configuring the lottery result to be displayed by the player, the player may be able to participate in the lottery.

  Specifically, when executing "return processing lottery effect" (when the "return flag" or the "false return flag" is on and the value of the "return counter" becomes "0") The sub controller 262 turns on the "button flag" for determining whether or not the operation (input) to the effect button 125 can be received, and receives the timing to start accepting the input to the effect button 125. The start timer and the reception stop timer for measuring the reception stop timing of the input to the effect button 125 are set. In addition, the normal processing (steps S704 to S708) of the sub control device 262 is provided with effect button processing that is periodically performed as in the other processing. Here, the effect button process will be described with reference to FIG. In the case where the “return process lottery effect” is performed a plurality of times, the process of FIG. 100 corresponds to the last “return process lottery effect”.

  First, in step S771, it is determined whether the "button flag" is on. If a negative determination is made in step S771, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S771, the process proceeds to step S772, and it is determined whether the value of the "reception start timer" is 0 or not, that is, the timing at which the input (operation) on the effect button 125 can be received. It is determined whether or not

  If a negative determination is made in step S772, that is, if the timing for receiving an input to the effect button 125 has not yet come, the process proceeds to step S773, and the value of the “reception start timer” is decremented by one. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S772, that is, if it is time to start accepting an input to the effect button 125, the process proceeds to step S774.

  In step S774, it is determined whether the "button display flag" is on or off. The “button display flag” is state determination information that determines whether or not the “button display command” described next is set. If the affirmative judgment is made in Step S774, that is, if the "button display command" is already set, the process proceeds to Step S777. On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S774, that is, if the "button display command" is not set, the process proceeds to step S775 to set the "button display command". The “button display command” is a command output to the display control device 45 in order to cause the display unit 42 a to display the button display BO for indicating to the player that the effect button 125 can be pressed. When the "button display command" is output to the display control device 45 in the external output process (S710), the display control device 45 causes the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the button display BO. By this display, the player can grasp that the operation of the effect button 125 is possible.

  Next, in step S776, the "button display flag" is turned on. Subsequently, in step S777, it is determined whether or not there has been an operation (input) on the effect button 125. When an affirmative determination is made in step S777, the process proceeds to step S780. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S777, the process proceeds to step S778, where the value of the "reception stop timer" is decremented by 1 and whether the value of the "reception stop timer" is 0 in step S779. That is, it is determined whether the reception time of the input to the effect button 125 has elapsed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S779, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S779, the process proceeds to step S780 as in the case where the operation for the effect button 125 is performed (S777: YES), and whether or not the "return flag" is on. Determine if When an affirmative determination is made in step S780, the process proceeds to step S781, and a "return process lottery effect command" ("success command") including information of winning the lottery result is set. By outputting the “success command” to the display control device 45 in the external output processing, the display control device 45 displays a display indicating that the lottery has been won on the display unit 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, FIG. )).

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S780, the process proceeds to step S782 to set a "return process lottery effect command" ("failure command") including information on non-winning of the lottery result. By outputting this “failure command” to the display control device 45 in the external output processing, the display control device 45 displays that the lottery has not been won in the display section 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, , FIG. 94).

  Following the processing of step S781 or step S782, in step S783, the "button display flag" is turned off, and in step S784, the "button flag" is turned off, thus ending this processing.

  In the above, the information on the lottery result is configured to be output to the display control device 45 when the effect button 125 is input or when the input acceptance time has elapsed, but "return process lottery effect" is started It is assumed that information about the lottery result is output to the display control device 45 in advance based on the on / off status of the “return flag” before the input to the effect button 125 and the elapse of the input acceptance time, such as the timing to It is also good. Then, the display control device 45 responds to the lottery result transmitted in advance by transmitting a predetermined command from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45 when the input to the effect button 125 or the input acceptance time has elapsed. Alternatively, the display may be performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, an effect ("indication lottery effect") may be performed that enlivens the player's interest by determining whether the "return process indication effect" is to be performed or not. When the lottery is won in the "suggested lottery effect", for example, a "return process suggested effect" (for example, FIG. 84) is performed in the decorative symbol display device 42 in which a predetermined character is displayed at the time of fluctuation etc. On the other hand, it is shown that "return production" will be performed later.

  The "indication lottery effect" is, for example, the sub-control device 262 that receives the "return effect command" performs the "indication lottery effect" on the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 before the "return effect" is executed. This can be realized by outputting a command to be executed by the display control device 45. Further, in the “indication lottery effect”, the same effect as the “return process lottery effect” may be performed.

  Furthermore, such "indication lottery effect" is in the "time reduction effect mode" after the "small hit" winning, and the stage before the predetermined number of fluctuation from the time when the "return effect" (return process) occurs You may go there. For example, in order to realize such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 101, first, in the small hitting end setting process of step S206-14-5, the setting process of the initial value of "return counter" (step S206- After 14-5-4) and before the setting process of the gaming state notification command (step S206-14-5-9), in step S206-14-5-B, "value MC for suggested lottery" Perform the setting process of The “indication lottery numerical value MC” is a numerical value defining the execution timing of the “indication lottery effect”.

  Further, the initial value of the “return counter” set in step S206-14-5-4 is, for example, a value of 2 or more in the numerical value (the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2) stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. And the like, and is configured such that a variable display is performed to some extent before the "return effect". This is to secure a time when it is possible to execute the "return processing suggestion effect". In addition, a value defined in advance as an initial value of the "counter for return" is set, and a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the initial value of the "counter for return" is set to the "value MC for suggestion lottery". It may be configured to be set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 102, in the return processing of step S205-16-8, following the subtraction processing of “counter for return” (step S205-16-8-1), in step S205-16-8-F. It is determined whether or not the value of the "counter for return" is equal to the "value MC for suggestion lottery". That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the "suggestive lottery effect". Here, when the value of the "counter for return" is equal to the "value MC for suggestion lottery" (S205-16-8-F: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-8-G, and "indication lottery" Set "reproduction command". The set “indication lottery effect command” is output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process, and the sub control device 262 that receives the “indication lottery effect command” controls the display control device 45. Then, in the front stage of the "return effect", the "indication lottery effect" is executed in the decorative symbol display device 42. In this aspect, as a result of the “indication lottery effect”, the player wins the lottery and indicates that the “return process suggestion effect” and thus the “return effect” (return process) is executed, or the lottery is not elected. , "Return processing suggestion effect" is not performed, eventually one of those showing the result as if "return effect" (return processing) is not performed will be displayed.

  Main control device 261 may determine or either sub control device 262 may determine which of the winning and non-winning is displayed as the lottery result of the “proposed lottery effect”.

  The determination of the lottery result of the “suggested lottery effect” in the main control device 261 can be realized, for example, by the following method. That is, the “indication lottery effect command” (success command) for causing main controller 261 to execute the effect of winning the lottery result in decorative symbol display device 42, and the lottery result in decorative symbol display device 42 is not elected At least two types of “indication lottery effect commands” (failed commands) for causing the effect to be performed are stored in advance. Then, by setting one of the success command and the failure command as the “indication lottery effect command”, the determination of the lottery result in the main control device 261 can be realized. Note that which of the success command and the failure command is to be set is determined by the on / off status of the "return flag". The success command can be set only when the "return flag" is on, and only the failure command is set when the "return flag" is off. However, when the “return flag” is on, it is not necessary to set a success command, and a failure command may be set. When the success command is output, the "return processing suggestion command" is also output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and after it is displayed that the lottery result is won, "return processing suggestion effect" Will be executed. On the other hand, when the failure command is output as the “indication lottery effect command”, the display to the effect that the lottery result is not won is executed, and the “return process indication effect” is not executed. Even when the failure command is output, the “return effect” is executed as long as the “return flag” is on.

  Further, the determination of the lottery result of the “indication lottery effect” in the sub control device 262 can be realized, for example, by the following method. That is, the “indication lottery effect command” (success command) output to the display control device 45 to cause the sub controller 262 to execute the effect that the lottery result will be won by the decorative symbol display device 42, and the lottery result In advance, at least two kinds of commands of “indication lottery effect command” (failed command) output to the display control device 45 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute an effect in which the character is not won are stored in advance . Further, it is configured to input information on on / off of the "return flag" from the main control device 261. Then, when information indicating that it is the execution timing of “indication lottery effect” is input from the main control device 261, the sub control device 262 is configured to be able to select the success command or the failure command. Thereby, it is possible to realize the determination of the lottery result of the “indication lottery effect” in the sub control device 262. The success command can be selected only when the "return flag" is on, and the failure command is always selected when the "return flag" is off. In addition, when the success command is selected, a “return processing suggestion command” is output from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45 together with the success command, and a display indicating that the lottery has been won in the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. Subsequently, “return processing suggestion effect” is executed. On the other hand, when the failure command is selected, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays that the lottery has not been won.

  Also in the “indication lottery effect”, the operation of the effect button 125 by the player may be involved.

  Furthermore, when the initial value of the “return counter” and information on on / off of the “return flag” are output to the sub controller 262 and the “return flag” is on in the sub controller 262. , Based on the initial value of the "return counter", the "indicative lottery numerical value MC" is determined, and the configuration process of the "indicative lottery effect command" corresponding to steps S205-16-8-F and G is performed. You may That is, not the main controller 261 but the sub controller 262 may be configured to perform most of the processing relating to the “indication lottery effect”.

  Furthermore, in step S206-14-5-B, a plurality of values may be set to "value MC for suggestion lottery" (in the case where a plurality of values are set to "value MC for suggestion lottery," " The initial value of the "return counter" is a value larger than the number of "indicative lottery numerical values MC" to be set. In this case, the “indication lottery effect” is performed a plurality of times, and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

  In addition, in the state of "return flag" being on, when performing "indication lottery effect" a plurality of times, while the lottery result is won in the last "indication lottery effect" immediately before the "return effect", In the "suggested lottery effect", the winning result may be non-winning. This is because, for example, in the configuration in which the main control unit 261 performs the main processing of “indication lottery effect”, the value of “return counter” is “indication lottery number MC” in step S205-16-8-F. It is possible to realize by configuring so as to set a “proposed lottery effect command” in which the lottery result is won in step S205-16-8-G only when the number is equal to the smallest number.

  When the lottery result is won in the “indication lottery effect”, the “indication lottery number MC” is set to a value exceeding the initial value of the “return counter” in the main controller 261 or the sub controller 262. Be done. Thereby, for example, after the winning result is obtained in the “indication lottery effect”, the “indication lottery effect” in the second place before the “return effect” is performed is canceled.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 103, the effect of displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the “return effect” is performed to enhance the player's interest as “the return process suggestion effect” (“return processing” It is good also as performing "the number of remaining times display production". Incidentally, in FIG. 103, it means the number of remaining fluctuation until the number "return effect" between "after" and "day" is executed. For example, if "after 50 days", "return effect" It means that the remaining number of changes until "is executed" is 50 times, and if it is "5 more days", it means that the remaining number of changes is 5 times. The “return processing remaining number display effect” is, for example, the above-mentioned remaining every time the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, every 5 times the variable display is performed) on the display unit 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 The number of times of change may be displayed, or the remaining number of times of change may be displayed so as to decrease by one each time the change is stopped.

  The “return processing remaining number display effect” can be realized, for example, as follows. That is, in the variable display setting of step S205-7, it is determined before the process of step S205-7-1 whether or not the value of the "return counter" is equal to the "number of remaining times display value". Then, if the value of the "return counter" is equal to the "remaining number display numerical value", the "return processing remaining number display command" is set. The "return processing remaining number display command" includes the value of the "return counter" when the command is set. In addition, “remaining number display numerical value” is a numerical value for defining the execution time of “return processing remaining number display effect”, for example, steps S206-14-5-3 to S206-14-5 in the return processing. In the processing between -9, a predetermined numerical value is set. In addition, it is preferable to set a relatively large value to the initial value of the "counter for return" in order to secure the execution time of the effect when executing the "reproduction processing remaining number of times display effect".

  Then, the set “return processing remaining number display command” is output to the sub control device 262 in the external output processing, and the sub control device 262 that has received the command performs “return processing remaining number display effect in the display control device 45. Command is set, and the set command is output to the display control unit 45. The set command includes information corresponding to the value of “return counter” included in “return processing remaining number display command”. Thereby, in the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, an effect ("reproduction processing remaining number display effect") displaying the value of the "return counter", that is, the remaining number of fluctuations until the "reproduction" is performed. ) Can be performed. For example, when 5 and 10 are set as the "remaining number display numerical value", "10" is displayed as the remaining fluctuation number in the variable display before 10 when the "return effect" is performed, In the five previous variable display where the “return effect” is performed, the “return process remaining number of times display effect” can be performed to display “5” as the remaining change number. In addition, for example, when 1, 2 and 3 are set as the “remaining number display effect”, the above-described fluctuation display is performed three, two, and one before the “return effect” is performed. It is possible to execute “return processing remaining number display effect” which displays “3”, “2” and “1” as the remaining number of changes.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 may be configured to perform processing mainly when executing the "return processing remaining number display effect". For example, information on on / off of the "return flag" and an initial value of the "counter for return" are output from the main controller 261 to the sub controller 262. Then, when the “return flag” is on, the sub-control device 262 sets the “number of remaining display indicators” based on the initial value of the “return counter”. Furthermore, every time the “variation pattern command” is input, 1 is subtracted from the initial value of the “return counter”, and the value obtained by subtraction is equal to the “number of remaining display numbers”. , And sets a command for executing “return processing remaining number display effect”, and outputs the set command to the display control device 45. As a result, it is possible to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute the “return processing remaining number of times display effect” while the sub control device 262 performs the main processing.

  In addition, various "return process suggestion effects" mentioned above may be combined suitably.

  In addition, "reproduction processing remaining number display production" is not limited to what is performed in the decorative symbol display device 42, and is performed by a plurality of light emitting means, such as LED and the like provided around the decorative symbol display device 42, the speaker SP and the like You may In the case of using the light emitting means, for example, each time the plurality of light emitting means are turned on when the remaining number of fluctuations until the “return effect” is performed reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation is stopped every time The light emitting means may be turned off by a predetermined number (for example, one by one), and all the light emitting means may be turned off immediately before the “return effect”. In addition, the plurality of light emitting means are turned off when the remaining number of fluctuations until the "return effect" is performed reaches a predetermined number of times set in advance, and the predetermined number of light emitting means is selected each time the fluctuation is stopped. You may make it light (for example, one each), and it may be comprised so that the said light emission means may light all right before "return production." Furthermore, in the case of using the speaker SP, for example, the variation from when the remaining number of variations until the “return effect” is performed reaches a predetermined number set in advance to immediately before the “return effect” At the time of start or fluctuation stop, the speaker SP may be configured to emit a sound or the like indicating the remaining number of fluctuation until the “return effect” is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned various effects illustrated as "return processing remaining frequency display production" may be combined suitably.

  The “return process lottery effect” is not limited to the above-described effect, and, for example, the decorative symbol display area 42 and the light emitting means such as LEDs annularly provided around the decorative symbol display area 42 may be used together. It is also possible to carry out by making it work. For example, as shown in FIG. 104, in the decorative symbol display area 42, items (for example, success, failure, etc.) corresponding to the lottery result are displayed in a ring. Then, by adjusting the on / off timing of the light emitting means provided around the decorative symbol display area 42, effects are produced as if light is moving around the decorative symbol display area 42. Then, the movement of the light is finally stopped, and the lottery result is determined by the position of the stopped light (for example, the above-mentioned drawing is located on a virtual line connecting the center of the decorative symbol display area 42 and the stopped light). The item may be configured to indicate the lottery result). In this case, an effect using a wide area of the game area is performed, and the interest for the player can be improved. It should be noted that both the “return process lottery effect” using the decorative symbol display area 42 and the light emitting means and the “return process lottery effect” (see FIG. 89) using the decorative symbol display area 42 described above are executed. It may be configured as possible. In this case, the execution probability of the former “return process lottery effect” and the latter “return process lottery effect” may be different depending on the lottery mode. For example, when the lottery mode is "high probability mode" (when "return effect" is executed), the former "return process lottery effect" is more easily executed than when it is "low probability mode" You may configure it. In this case, if the former "return processing lottery effect" (that is, "return processing lottery effect using a wider area" is made), the "return effect" is performed on the player. It is possible to hold the feeling of anticipation as being stronger, and to further improve the interest for the player.

  (P) In the above embodiment, when the "small hit" occurs in the "probability effect mode" and the return effect is performed, the value of the "support number counter" is not reset, and the sub control device 262 Dummy information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as if it corresponds to the remaining number of times of variation to which the "high support mode" is given. On the other hand, when "small hit" occurs in the "probability change effect mode" and "return effect" is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 105, step S206-14-5 of the small hit end setting process. In -C, as shown in FIG. 106, while the “support number of times counter” is set to the same value (100 times in this example) as the value set when “2R hour / day big hit” occurs, as shown in FIG. Is set (at step S205-16-8-H), the value set when “16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot” occurs in the counter value of “support count”. The same value as in (e.g., "99999" corresponding to 99999 times of the variable display) may be reset. In this case, by transmitting the "support number counter" to the sub control device 262, using the value of the "support number counter", the remaining fluctuation number to which the "high support mode" is given is displayed as a decorative symbol It can be displayed on the device 42. Therefore, the information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given, which is displayed when the "2R hour / short / big hit" occurs, and the remaining with the "high support mode", which is displayed when the "small hit" occurs. The information (dummy information) corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the parameter can be acquired from the common “number of times of support counter”. As a result, the processing for obtaining the dummy information and the like in the sub control device 262 become unnecessary, and the processing load and data capacity can be reduced. In addition, when resetting the “number-of-supports counter”, the value of the “counter for return”, that is, the number of fluctuations from the occurrence of the “small hit” until the “return effect” is performed is “2R It is preferable to make it smaller than the value (100 times) of the "number of times of support counter" set when the "time and money big hit" occurs. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a change to the "low support mode" before the "return effect", and the gaming value ("high probability mode") provided along with the occurrence of the "small hit" And it is possible to prevent the occurrence of fluctuations in “high support mode until next time”.

  (Q) In the above embodiment, although the stages displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 are one type in the “probability effect mode” and the “time reduction effect mode”, etc., a plurality of stages are provided for each effect mode. May be prepared, and one of a plurality of stages may be selected and displayed in each effect mode. The selection of the stage may be performed by the main control device 261 or by the sub control device 262.

  (R) In the “variation pattern command” output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262 in the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. Super reach etc. is included, but "variation pattern command" is configured to include only information on variation type (for example, information on hit or miss) and variation time, and the sub control device 262 inputs It is also possible to determine an effect mode in the case of the variable display on the basis of the “variation pattern command”. This is done, for example, when a table stored for the presentation mode corresponding to each "variation pattern command" is prepared in advance in the sub control device 262, and "variation pattern command" is input to the sub control device 262. In addition, the sub controller 262 is configured to select a table corresponding to the input “variation pattern command” from the above-mentioned tables, and to select / determine an effect mode from the selected table. Is possible.

  (S) In the above embodiment, various processes executed by the main control device 261 may be configured to be executed by the sub control device 262. For example, in the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to set “playing state determination value Xj”, “return effect command”, etc., but the sub control device 262 sets “playing state determination value Xj”. Alternatively, settings such as “return effect command” may be performed.

  Hereinafter, the technical ideas which are not described in the claims of the claims and can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described together with the effects thereof.

Means 1. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided;
Starting ball entry means disposed in the game area;
First lottery means for performing a first hit / fall lottery with a first winning probability due to the game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
Second lottery means for performing a second hit / fall lottery with a second winning probability due to the game ball entering the start ball entering means;
First special game state generation means for generating a first special game state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the first success / failure lottery;
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode Switching means,
Mode determining means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state according to the winning result, when the winning result is obtained by the first success / failure lottery;
Second special game state generation means for generating a second special game state that is not more advantageous than the first special game state, when a winning result is obtained by the second success / failure lottery,
Effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode in a predetermined display means to various modes;
Effect control means for controlling an effect in the display means based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means;
Equipped with
It is a gaming machine in which, when a winning result is obtained by the second success / failure lottery, the first winning probability at the time when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The effect mode setting means is
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the first success or failure lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means Effect mode to be set when
A game machine characterized in that the same can be set.

  When there are a plurality of "first special game states", the "second special game state" is less advantageous than the most advantageous first special game state for the player. For example, in the above embodiment, "16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R time junior high jackpot" and "2R regular jackpot" as jackpot states corresponding to "first special game state" Exists, but the “second special game state” (small hit state in the above embodiment) is more advantageous than the “16R probability variation big hit” which is the jackpot state most advantageous to the player among the respective jackpot states. It is good if there is nothing.

  In addition, “identical” is that, when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the effect mode set when the winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery, and the lottery mode is set to the specific mode When it is, the winning result is obtained by the first success or failure lottery, and the effect mode set when the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means is exactly the same Not only when there is a difference between the two production modes, but also when the two production modes are similar or confusing to such an extent that the player can not recognize the difference unless they are particularly aware of the difference.

  In recent years, there are gaming machines that generate a second special game state (so-called small hit) separately from the first special game state (so-called big hit). The small hit is provided, for example, for the purpose of slightly increasing the game balls (balls held) possessed by the player, and if a small hit occurs, although it is not advantageous over the jackpot state, the state is slightly advantageous to the player. Occur. In addition, after the small hitting state, the jackpot winning probability until then is maintained.

  By the way, a small hit may occur in a specific mode (so-called high probability mode). The occurrence of such a small hit state may be meaningless to a player who is in a high probability mode and is in a state where the occurrence of a jackpot state that is more advantageous than the small hit state can be expected. In addition, the occurrence of such a small hit state may reduce the interest for the player.

  In this respect, according to the above means 1, when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the second winning lottery, and the winning result is obtained by the first winning lottery, and the lottery mode In the case where is switched to the normal mode, the subsequent rendering mode may be set to the same one. Here, since the first winning probability is high in the specific mode, the player in the specific mode usually plays a game while having a high sense of expectation for the next hit or the like. On the other hand, winning in the first success or failure in the specific mode may result in switching from the specific mode of the lottery mode to the normal mode with a low winning probability, and switching of the effect mode accompanying switching to the normal mode is Usually, the sense of expectation etc. possessed by the player is suddenly lost, and the player is given a great feeling of disappointment that "the specific mode has ended". In view of this point, in the above means 1, even if the second success or failure lottery is won in the specific mode and the lottery mode is maintained as the specific mode, the first success or failure lottery is won in the specific mode, the lottery mode Even when the mode is switched to the normal mode, the effect mode is configured to be the same. That is, even if the winning mode is won in the specific mode and the effect mode is switched and set, the specific mode may be maintained. Then, for the player, since it will be the same effect mode after winning, it will be elected in the second success or failure lottery, whether the lottery mode is maintained in the specific mode, or won in the first success or failure lottery, the lottery mode is usually It becomes difficult to determine whether the mode has been switched to. Therefore, for the player, the feeling of disappointment that the player has shifted to the normal mode is relatively reduced, and the player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the specific mode is still maintained. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

  In addition, in the starting ball entering means, for example, through balls such as through gates, the ball passing means through which the game ball can pass (after the game ball which has entered the ball is detected by the predetermined detecting means, returns to the game area again Ball entry means configured as described above are also included.

Means 2. When a winning result is obtained by at least one of the double-pass lottery, an ending effect indicating the effect mode of the display means after the end of the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state is performed,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first success or failure lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. The ending effect to be performed by the display means when it is set;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the ending effect to be performed by the display means can be set to be the same when the winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery. The gaming machine according to the means 1, characterized in that

  According to the above means 2, in the specific mode, the ending effect is obtained when the winning result is obtained by the second winning lottery and when the winning result is obtained by the first winning lottery and the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode. May be set to the same. Therefore, it becomes more difficult for the player to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode has been entered. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the player.

  In addition, although it is general to individually prepare an ending effect to be performed when a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery in the specific mode, it takes time to create the effect. On the other hand, the degree of improvement in the playability provided by this ending effect is not so high. Therefore, in consideration of the degree of improvement of the playability, it is not preferable to spend effort on creating the ending effect.

  In this respect, according to the above means 2, there is no need to individually prepare the ending effect to be performed when the winning result is obtained by the second hit / fall lottery in the specific mode, and the effect does not contribute much to the improvement of the game Can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required for creating effects without causing a decrease in gameplay. Further, on the gaming machine side, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and the processing load.

  The operation and effect of the means 2 are more effective in the configuration in which it is difficult to obtain a winning result by the second acceptance lottery in the specific mode.

Means 3. When a winning result is obtained by at least one of the double-pass lottery, an effect is performed by the display means during the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first success or failure lottery, and an effect executed by the display means while the first special gaming state is occurring,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery, and an effect to be executed by the display means while the second special gaming state is occurring is The gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2 characterized in that the same can be set.

  In addition, "representation" in the above means 3 includes "ending effect" in the above means 2, and "opening effect", "big hit medium effect" ("small hit middle effect") and "ending" in the above embodiment It corresponds to "representation".

  According to the above means 3, the winning result is obtained by the first hit lottery in the specific mode, and the effect executed by the display means while in the first special gaming state, and the second hit lottery in the specific mode The winning result is obtained, and the effect to be executed by the display means while in the second special gaming state may be set to the same one. Therefore, it is more difficult for the player to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is entered, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

  Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned means 3, it is not necessary to separately prepare the effects to be performed when the winning result is obtained by the second hit / fall lottery in the specific mode, and it is possible to further reduce the effort required for effect creation. In addition, on the gaming machine side, data capacity and processing burden can be further reduced.

  Means 4. When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery, and after the effect mode in the display means is made the same, the lottery by the first lottery means It is characterized by comprising information transmitting means for emitting information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, to the player when the number of times (that is, the number of times of change) becomes equal to or more than a specified number. A gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3.

  It should be noted that the fact that "the effect mode in the display means is the same" means that the effect mode in the display means is more specifically selected by the first chance lottery when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode. It means that the winning result is obtained and the same effect mode as that set when the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode is set by the mode switching means. The prescribed number of times includes 0 times.

  According to the means 4, the information transmitting means indicates that the drawing mode is set to the specific mode in a state in which it is difficult to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is entered. . Here, according to the above-described means 1, even when the effect mode is switched and set in the specific mode, the specific mode may be maintained, and the effect mode is switched and set in the specific mode. However, although the player can play the game with a sufficient sense of expectation, for the player who does not know this, the switching of the rendering mode causes a great feeling of disappointment. However, according to the above-described means 4, it is indicated that the information transmitting means is performed and maintained in the specific mode in a state where the player has a large feeling of disappointment as described above. As a result, the player's mood rises from a disappointing state to a happy state at a stretch, and the player can gain great joy and satisfaction. This makes it possible to dramatically improve the interest for the player.

  In addition, even when the effect mode is switched and set, a sufficiently large feeling of satisfaction can be felt even for a player who knows that the specific mode can be maintained. That is, if the effect mode switching setting occurs in association with the winning in the specific mode, the player is somewhat anxious about "has not shifted to the normal mode", but is specified by the information transmission means As the maintenance of the mode is indicated, the above-mentioned sense of apprehension is wiped out, and the player can obtain a great satisfaction or the like that "specification has been maintained."

Means 5. The prescribed number of times is set based on a counter whose numerical value fluctuates,
The gaming machine according to the means 4, wherein the counter is also used for processing other than setting of the specified number of times.

  According to the above-mentioned means 5, the prescribed number of times can be made different times, and the transmission timing of information by the information transmission means can be set to various timings. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the interest for the player.

  Further, the counter is configured to be shared by setting of a prescribed number of times and other processing. Therefore, complication of the device and the control process can be suppressed.

  Means 6. Before the information indicating that the drawing mode is set to the specific mode is issued to the player by the information transmitting unit, the information transmitting unit transmits the information to the player by the information transmitting unit. The gaming machine according to the means 4 or 5, characterized by comprising a suggestable second information transmitting means.

  According to the means 6, the second information transmission means suggests transmission of the information by the information transmission means before the information is emitted by the information transmission means. Therefore, the player has a feeling of disappointment and anxiety by the effect mode being switched and set with the win in the specific mode, but the information of the above means 4 is indicated by the suggestion of the information by the second information transmission means. A player who does not know the means of transmission reduces the feeling of disappointment and anxiety felt by the player and has a great expectation that something of an advantageous state may occur. In this state, the information transmission means of the means 4 transmits information, and it is indicated that the specific mode is maintained, whereby the player says that "the sense of expectation of oneself has become real". I can get a great sense of satisfaction. As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved.

  Also, for the player who knows the information transmission means of the means 4, it is possible to grasp that the specific mode is maintained before the transmission of information by the information transmission means, and a sense of security that the specific mode is maintained. Can be obtained earlier. Therefore, even if the decrease in interest caused by the uneasy feeling of "shifting to the normal mode" occurs, it can be resolved early, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 7. The game ball has a displacing member that can be displaced between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter the ball, and a winning result is obtained in the first hit / not lottery or the second hit / not lottery A specific ball entry means which causes the displacement member to open when it
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery, and when the displacing member is in the open state, the game ball enters the ball for the specific entering means. When there is, the second information transmission means can suggest transmission of the information by the information transmission means.

  According to the above-mentioned means 7, the player is not only the gaming ball paid out by entering the ball, but also the second information due to the entering of the gaming ball to the specific entering means when the winning result is obtained by the second success / fall lottery. It is also possible to obtain a suggestion by the transmission means (material for determining whether the lottery mode is the specific mode). Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest for the player.

  Also, if the player can enter the game ball into the specific ball entry means even if the player side wins the winning lottery that can fall into the normal mode, the suggestion by the second information transmission means is generated, and hence It looks like you can get back to the specific mode. Therefore, in the second special game state, it is possible to play a game in which the game ball is positively aimed at entering the specific ball entry means, and it is possible to further improve the interest for the player.

Means 8. The start-in ball-in means includes first start-in ball-in means and second start-in ball-in means capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area.
When the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the second starting ball entry means is a closed state in which the gaming ball can not enter or difficult to enter, and an opened state in which the gaming ball can enter or can enter easily. And at least one opening / closing member displaceable between
In the normal mode, it is possible to set a low ball entry state in which the open / close condition is not easily established, and
In the specific mode, it is possible to set a high entering state where the opening / closing condition is more easily established than the low entering state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7, characterized in that the second success / failure lottery is performed only due to the game ball entering the first starting ball entering means.

  According to the above-mentioned means 8, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into both starting ball entering means when it is set to the high ball entering state, the frequency of ball entering into the first starting ball entering means relatively decreases. And since the second hit or draw can occur only by entering the first starting ball entry means, it is won by the second hit lottery in a high entry state where it is difficult to enter the ball into the first start ball entry means The frequency of occurrence of Therefore, when a hit occurs in the high entering state of the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the lottery mode is often switched to the normal mode. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to more surely recognize that the lottery mode has been shifted from the specific mode to the normal mode.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine in which it is difficult for the winning by the second hit or absence lottery to occur in the high entering state like the above means 8, the execution frequency of the effect (ending effect etc.) corresponding to the winning is lower. By adopting the means 3, there is no need to prepare such a low frequency of execution (such as ending effect). That is, it is possible to avoid the creation of an effect whose execution frequency is lower and the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game property is lower.

Means 9. The first starting ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball fired by the launching means can reach so as to pass at least a first area of the gaming area,
The second starting ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball fired by the launching means can reach so as to pass at least a second area of the gaming area,
The first starting ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball fired by the launching means can not enter or difficult to enter so as to pass through the second area. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above-mentioned means 9, in the high entering state where the opening condition of the second starting entry means tends to be satisfied, the game ball is usually aimed to pass through the second area aiming at the second starting entry means. To fire. Here, in the above-mentioned means 9, the gaming ball fired so as to pass through the second area can not enter the ball or can not enter the first starting ball entry means. Therefore, the second success or failure lottery that may occur only by entering the first starting ball entry means becomes even less likely to occur. Therefore, when a hit occurs in the high entering state of the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the lottery mode is more often set to be switched to the normal mode. This makes it easier for the player to more surely recognize that the lottery mode has been shifted from the specific mode to the normal mode.

  Further, according to the above-mentioned means 9, although the execution frequency of the effect (ending effect etc.) corresponding to the winning by the second hit / fall lottery in the specific mode is much lower, by adopting the above-mentioned means 2 or 3 There is no need to prepare an effect that has a very low frequency of execution. That is, it is possible to avoid the creation of the effect that the execution frequency is very low and the degree of contribution to the improvement of the playability is even lower.

Means 10. A first special display means for performing stop display in a specific mode based on a lottery result of the acceptance lottery resulting from the game ball entering the first start ball entering means after the variable display is performed;
Second special display means for performing stop display in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the acceptance lottery resulting from the game ball entering the second starting ball entering means after the variable display is performed;
The lottery result of the acceptance lottery due to the game ball entering the first starting ball entering means is stored, and the variable display to be executed by the first special display means is already executed based on the lottery result. A first holding means for waiting until the end of the variable display,
The lottery result of the acceptance lottery due to the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means is stored, and the variable display executed by the second special display means is already executed based on the lottery result. And second holding means for waiting until the end of the variable display.
When there is a variable display waiting by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display waiting by the second holding means is preferentially executed. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above-mentioned means 10, when the above-mentioned predetermined opening condition is satisfied, it becomes a state where it is easy to enter more game balls into the second starting ball entry means, and the fluctuation display concerning the said ball entry In order to be able to digest preferentially, it is possible to execute more 1st chance lottery and 2nd chance lottery more in a short period, and in a more short period more 1st special gaming state and 2nd special gaming state It becomes easier to win.

  In addition, since the winning lottery with the entry into the second starting ball entry means is preferentially performed, it is more difficult for the winning in the second win lottery due to the entry into the first starting ball entry means. Thus, when a hit occurs in the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the player can more easily recognize that the lottery mode has been shifted from the specific mode to the normal mode.

  Furthermore, according to the means 10, the execution frequency of the effect corresponding to the winning of the second hit / fall lottery is further reduced, but by employing the means 2 or the means 3, such an execution frequency is extremely low. There is no need to prepare. That is, it is possible to avoid the creation of the effect that the execution frequency is extremely low and the degree of contribution to the improvement of the playability is even lower.

Means 11. The start-in ball-in means includes first start-in ball-in means and second start-in ball-in means capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area.
When the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the second starting ball entry means is a closed state in which the gaming ball can not enter or difficult to enter, and an opened state in which the gaming ball can enter or can enter easily. And at least one opening / closing member displaceable between
In the normal mode, it is possible to set a low ball entry state in which the open / close condition is not easily established, and
In the specific mode, it is possible to set a high entering state where the opening / closing condition is more easily established than the low entering state,
The second success or failure lottery is performed on the basis of entering the game ball into the first starting ball entry means and entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry means The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 7.

  According to the above means 11, since the second hit or draw can be generated by entering the ball into both starting entry means, in the specific mode which can be set to the high entry state, the occurrence frequency of winning by the second hit or draw is Get higher. Therefore, when the first success lottery or the second success lottery is won in the specific mode, the probability that the winning is due to the second success lottery is enhanced, and as a result, the probability that the specific mode is maintained is increased. Therefore, the player is more likely to have a sense of expectation that the specific mode is still maintained. As a result, it is possible to make the game hard to get bored and to further improve the interest for the player.

  Means 12. The second winning probability used in the second hit or draw due to the game ball entering the second starting ball entering means is caused by the game ball entering the first starting ball entering means The gaming machine according to the means 11, characterized in that it is higher than the second winning probability used in the second success / failure lottery.

  According to the above-described means 12, when the first success lottery or the second success lottery is won in the specific mode, the probability that the winning is due to the second success lottery is further enhanced. Therefore, the player can further expect maintenance of the specific mode, and can further improve the interest.

Means 13. The effect mode setting means is
When the lottery mode is set to the normal mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the normal mode, a winning result is obtained by the first success or failure lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the specific mode by the mode switching means. Effect mode set when set, and
The game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 12, characterized in that the same can be set.

  According to the above-mentioned means 13, in the normal mode, the effect mode set when the winning result is obtained by the second winning lottery, and the winning result by the first winning lottery where the lottery mode is switched to the specific mode The effect mode set when obtained may be the same. Therefore, the player can not determine whether the lottery mode is the normal mode or the specific mode (the so-called latency mode) by the effect mode. As a result, the player can play the game with an expectation of not being in the specific mode, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 14. It has a specific ball entry means having a displacement member that can be displaced between an open state where the gaming ball can enter and a closed state where the gaming ball can not enter the ball,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first success or failure lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. An opening / closing pattern of the displacement member when it is set;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the opening and closing pattern of the displacement member can be set to the same one when the winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 13.

  According to the above-mentioned means 14, when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, when the win occurs by the second lottery, the win occurs by the first lottery, and the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode. In this case, not only the effect mode but also the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member may be the same. Therefore, the player can not determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is entered, by the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member. As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 15. When the winning result is obtained by the first success or failure lottery when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a symbol which is displayed on the display means in a stopped state;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, when the winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery, it is possible to set the same symbol as the symbol which is displayed in a stopped state on the display means. A game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 14, characterized in that

  According to the above-mentioned means 15, it is not possible to determine, based on the symbol displayed in a stopped state, whether the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery has been won. Therefore, the player can not further determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is switched, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 16. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided;
Starting ball entry means disposed in the game area;
Display means capable of variably displaying predetermined identification information;
Due to the game ball entering the starting ball entry means, due to the first lottery means performing the first hit or absence lottery with the first winning probability, and entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means Main control means having a second lottery means for performing a second success or failure lottery with a second winning probability;
And sub-control means for controlling a predetermined display means based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control means.
The main control means
First special game state generation means for generating a first special game state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the first success / failure lottery;
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode Switching means,
Mode determining means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state according to the winning result, when the winning result is obtained by the first success / failure lottery;
Second special game state generation means for generating a second special game state that is not more advantageous than the first special game state, when a winning result is obtained by the second success / failure lottery,
Variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns relating to the effect performed by the display means;
And a variation pattern command output unit that selects one of the variation pattern storage units and outputs a variation pattern command corresponding to the selected variation pattern to the sub control unit.
The variation pattern command includes mode information relating to a rendering mode in the display unit being set when the variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern command output unit,
The sub control means
Mode information storage means capable of storing mode information including the fluctuation pattern command input from the main control means;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode in the display means in consideration of at least mode information stored in the mode information storage means;
It is a gaming machine in which, when a winning result is obtained by the second success / failure lottery, the first winning probability at the time when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The variation pattern command output unit
Mode information included in the fluctuation pattern command to be output after the second special gaming state, when the winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first success or failure lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. When set, mode information included in the fluctuation pattern command to be output after the first special gaming state;
A game machine characterized in that the same can be set.

  According to the means 16, the same function and effect as the means 1 can be basically obtained.

  Further, according to the above-mentioned means 16, when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the mode information included in the variation pattern command set when the win is obtained in the second acceptance lottery, and the lottery mode is specified When the mode is set, the winning is obtained in the first lottery, and the mode information included in the variation pattern command set when the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode may be set to the same one. Therefore, the sub control means can perform the processing based on the mode information common to both, and the control processing can be simplified.

Means 17. A trigger entering means (e.g., a through gate) provided at a position where only the game balls launched by the launching means can pass so as to pass through the second area;
Third lottery means for performing a third hit / lottery (for example, open lottery) at a third probability of winning due to entering or passing of the game ball to the trigger entering means;
And third display means for performing stop display in a specific mode based on a lottery result of the third hit / not lottery after the variable display is performed,
When the winning result is obtained by at least the third success or failure lottery, the open condition is satisfied.
The second starting ball entry means is
When the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the closing state is switched to the opening state, and the opening and closing process can be performed a predetermined number of times to make the closing state when the specified time has elapsed or when the specified number of gaming balls enter. The gaming machine according to the means 9 characterized in that

  Means 18. At least the gaming state can be switched between a low ball entry state in which the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the second starting ball entry means is relatively low and a relatively high high ball entry state A game machine according to the means 17 characterized in that it has ball entering state switching means.

  According to the means 18, since the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the second start-in ball-in means increases during the high ball-in state, the second start-in ball-in compared to the low ball-in state. The number of winnings to the means increases. Therefore, it is possible to obtain more first chance lottery and second chance lottery lottery opportunities in a shorter period of time, and it becomes easier to win more first special gaming state and second special gaming state in a shorter period of time. In addition, during high entry status, compared with low entry status, the overall number of prize balls paid out inevitably increases, so the decrease in holding balls is relatively small, and the player has a decrease in holding balls. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the game for winning the first special game state and the second special game state without paying much attention.

  Means 19. The gaming machine according to the means 18, characterized in that the high ball entry state is a state satisfying at least one of the following configurations (1) to (5).

(1) A state in which the variable display time in the third display means is shortened compared to the low ball entry state (2) The prescribed time relating to the opening and closing process of the second starting ball entry means is compared with the low ball entry state (3) The number of executions of the opening / closing process performed at one time when the winning result is obtained by the third hit / not lottery (4) A state in which the winning probability in the third hit / drop lottery is higher than the winning probability in the low ball entry state According to the above means 19, as the high ball entry state (1 Any combination of the constitutions of (1) to (4) [eg (1), (2), (3), (4), (1) and (2), (1) and (3), (1) and ((1) 4), (2) and (3), (2) and (4), (3) and (4), (1) and (2) and (3) , (1) and (2) and (4), (1) and (3) and (4), (2) and (3) and (4), (1) and (2) and (3) and (( 4) can be adopted.

  Below, the basic composition of the various game machines to which each said means is applied is shown.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed embodiment, “the operation means (game ball emission handle) operated by the player, and the emission means (emission motor etc.) for releasing the game ball based on the operation of the operation means A ball game machine having a game area in which the game balls are guided and ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) disposed in the game area can be mentioned.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above-described means is a ball game machine having a gaming area extending substantially in the vertical direction. As a more detailed embodiment, “the operation means (game ball emission handle) operated by the player, and the emission means (emission motor etc.) for releasing the game ball based on the operation of the operation means Game balls are guided, and a predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, A ball game machine having a variable winning device, an operation opening, etc.) and configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means, or each of the ballistic gaming machines, is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

  d. The gaming machine in each of the above-described means is a drum-type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed embodiment, “variation display (specifically, a reel of a symbol, a rotating body such as a reel, a belt, etc. specifically attached with a symbol) consisting of a plurality of identification information (symbols) (specifically, a reel Etc.) (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) for stopping and displaying the identification information sequence, and the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever) The variation of identification information (pattern) is started, and the variation of identification information (pattern) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, stop button). There is a "roll-type gaming machine" configured to be provided with a gaming value on condition that the information is specific identification information.

  e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are integrated (in particular, a gaming machine having a slot machine specification that uses gaming balls as gaming media). As a more detailed embodiment, “variation display (specifically, a reel of a symbol, a rotating body such as a reel, a belt, etc. specifically attached with a symbol) consisting of a plurality of identification information (symbols) Etc.) (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) for stopping and displaying the identification information sequence, and the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever) The variation of identification information (pattern) is started, and the variation of identification information (pattern) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, stop button). The game value is provided on condition that the information is specific identification information, and further, a ball receiving plate (upper plate etc.) is provided, and the ball receiving plate is provided with a taking-in means for taking the gaming ball from the ball receiving plate Payout means to pay out game balls Comprising a configuration and gaming machine "and the like as starting condition of the game is satisfied by the game ball is captured by the capturing means.

  10: Pachinko machine, 18: handle, 30: game board, 32: variable winning device, 32a: large winning opening, 32b: opening and closing plate, 33A: upper starting winning opening, 33B: lower starting winning opening, 34: through gate, 35: Variable display unit, 37: Motorized part, 37a: Movable blade, 42: Decorative symbol display device, 43L: First special display device, 43R: Second special display device, 44: Holding lamp, 45: Display control Device 46a: first reserve lamp 46b: second reserve lamp 60: launcher 261: main controller 262: sub controller 311: payout controller Xj: game state determination value.

Claims (2)

Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided;
Starting ball entry means disposed in the game area;
First lottery means for performing a first hit / fall lottery with a first winning probability due to the game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
Second lottery means for performing a second hit / fall lottery with a second winning probability due to the game ball entering the start ball entering means;
First special game state generation means for generating a first special game state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the first success / failure lottery;
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode Switching means,
Mode determining means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state according to the winning result, when the winning result is obtained by the first success / failure lottery;
Second special game state generation means for generating a second special game state that is not more advantageous than the first special game state, when a winning result is obtained by the second success / failure lottery,
Display means capable of variably displaying predetermined identification information;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode in the display means to various modes;
Effect control means for controlling an effect in the display means based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means;
Equipped with
It is a gaming machine in which, when a winning result is obtained by the second success / failure lottery, the first winning probability at the time when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The effect mode setting means is
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the first success or failure lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means Effect mode to be set when
Can be set der to the same thing is,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery, and after the effect mode in the display means is made the same, the lottery by the first lottery means Information transmitting means for emitting information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode to the player when the number of times reaches a prescribed number of times,
Before the information indicating that the drawing mode is set to the specific mode is issued to the player by the information transmitting unit, the information transmitting unit transmits the information to the player by the information transmitting unit. Second information transmission means that can be suggested;
The game ball has a displacing member that can be displaced between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter the ball, and a winning result is obtained in the first hit / not lottery or the second hit / not lottery And a specific ball entry means for causing the displacement member to be in an open state,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second success or failure lottery, and when the displacing member is in the open state, the game ball enters the ball for the specific entering means. When there is, the second information transmission means can suggest transmission of the information by the information transmission means . The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images